The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About515 E Dyer Rd-Electrical Equipt - PlanCOMPANY - ADDRESS - REPRESENTATIVE: NAME - EMAIL - PHONE - ARCHITECTURE COMPANY - ADDRESS - REPRESENTATIVE: NAME - EMAIL - PHONE - MEP ENGINEERING COMPANY - ADDRESS - REPRESENTATIVE: NAME - EMAIL - PHONE - KPFF 140 NEWPORT CENTER DR, STE 100 NEWPORT BEACH, CA 92660 ALI KHAMSI TBD 949.478.8801 CIVIL NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1416 NW 46th STREET, SUITE 105-138 SEATTLE, WA 98107 TYSON PARKS TPARKS@NELSONWW.COM 206.408.8630 WINDWARD ENGINEERS & CONSULTANTS 448 SOUTH HILL STREET, SUITE 1001 LOS ANGELES, CA 90013 REBECCA OYLER REBECCA.OYLER@WINDWARDEC.COM 404.969.3659 SHEET INDEX NUMBER NAME 00 GENERAL INFORMATION G-001 COVER SHEET 01 CIVIL C0.01 TITLE SHEET C0.02 COMPOSITE SITE PLAN C1.20 EROSION CONTROL AND DEMOLITION PLAN C1.30 GRADING PLAN C1.50 PAVING AND UTILITY PLAN C5.00 DETAILS C6.00 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.01 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.02 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.03 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.04 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.05 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL C6.06 SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL 02 STRUCTURAL S0.01 GENERAL NOTES S0.02 GENERAL NOTES. ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS S5.01 EQUIPMENT DETAILS 03 ELECTRICAL EV0.01 SYMBOLS, LEGENDS, AND ABBREVIATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV1.00 SITE PAN ELECTRICAL EV6.00 RISER DIAGRAMS - ELECTRICAL EV7.00 SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL EV9.00 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.01 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.02 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.03 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL Grand total: 25 PROJECT SITE PROJECT AREA PROJECT DIRECTORY SHEET LIST PROJECT & CODE INFORMATION VICINITY MAP PROJECT ADDRESS: PROJECT SCOPE DESCRIPTION: POWER COMPANY: CITY/COUNTY JUSRISDICTION: LATITUDE: LONGITUDE: PARCEL NUMBER: BUILDING AREA (NO CHANGE): PROJECT AREA: OCCUPANCY TYPE (NO CHANGE): CONSTRUCTION TYPE: BUILDING AREA CLEAR HEIGHT: ALLOWABLE AREA: SPRINKLER: CALL BEFORE YOU DIG ZONING: APPLICABLE CODES CONTRACTOR NOTES: • CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETE INSTALL PER THE SIGNED AND SEALED SET OF DRAWINGS. ANY NECESSARY DEVIATIONS FROM THE DRAWING MUST BE SUBMITTED THROUGH AN RFI REQUEST PROCESS WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER. FOR AN APPROVAL PRIOR TO CONTRACTOR PROCEEDING WITH A DEVIATION OF THE SIGNED AND SEALED SET OF DRAWINGS. • CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL PLANS, EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS ON THE JOB SITE AND SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ENGINEER IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. FLOOD HAZARD: METHANE HAZARD: 10 / 1 4 / 2 0 2 5 1 0 : 4 8 : 4 7 A M 515 E, DYER RD. SANTA ANA, CA 92707 - NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE, INCLUDING PRIMARY METERING CABINET AND SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION, TO SUPPORT FLEET VEHICLE EV CHARGING (EV CHARGERS ARE NOT IN THE SCOPE OF WORK) - NEW PADS AND MINOR SITE MODIFICATIONS TO SUPPORT EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE - UTILIZE TWO TEMPORARY GENERATORS TO PROVIDE POWER DURING THE SERVICE CHANGEOVER. USE OF TEMPORARY GENERATOR POWER EXPECTED TO BE 2 WEEKS AND NOT TO EXCEED 60 DAYS. - UTILITY INTERCONNECTION - BUILDING TR SCOPE ONLY SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON CITY OF SANTA ANA, CA 33° 42' 32.80" N 117° 51' 37.46" W 2748-002-047, 2748-002-048 373,640 APPROX 360 SF APPROX. - WAREHOUSE: S-1 (PRIMARY) - WAREHOUSE: S-2 (PRIMARY) - BUSINES: B (ACCESSORY) - ASSEMBLY: A (ACCESSORY) III-B (S-1 & S-2 BUILDING SIDE) & VI-B (B & A BUILDING SIDE) VARIES, VERIFY IN FIELD UNLIMITED PER CBC 507.3 YES, SPRINKLED PER SECTION 507 (EXISTIGN TO REMAIN) ZONE: MR 2-1 - CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE 2022 W/ SANTA ANA AMENDMENTS - CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE 2022 - CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE 2022 - CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE 2022 - CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE 2022 - NFPA 13-FIRE SPRINKLER 2022 - NFPA 72 - FIRE ALARM 2022 - SANT ANA MUNICIPAL CODE 2019 X-0602320278J N/A NORTH E DYER RD. EV CHARGER DATA EVSG (SWITCHGEAR ONLY) - CURRENT SCOPE OF WORK 0 0 0 0 EV CHARGERS - NOT IN SCOPE OF WORK 119 119 2 2 FULL DESIGN PROJECT L2 CHARGERS L2 STALLS L3 CHARGERS L3 STALLS 2 2119 119 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 10 / 1 4 / 2 0 2 5 1 0 : 4 8 : 4 7 A M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 - E V S G- A R C H . r v t G-001 COVER SHEET DLX8 - EVSG 515 E, DYER RD. SANTA ANA, CA 92707 RO23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue: No: Date: CD 30 11.03.2023 CD 50 05.24.2024 CD 90 03.11.2025 Issue for Permit 04.21.2025 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 09.19.2025 DLX8 - EVSG 515 E, DYER RD. SANTA ANA, CA 92707 1 1 06/30/202306/30/2027 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Design and construction of formwork for concrete. 2. Setting in forms, all anchor bolts, metal inserts, sleeves, etc., embedded in concrete. 3. Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in- place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete all Work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Furnishing and placing reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 20 00. 2. Concrete Paving: Formwork for site concrete work, Section 32 13 13. 3. Furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing of cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 30 00. 4. Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts, Section 03 30 00. 5. Screeds for slabs, Section 03 30 00. 6. Metal decking, Section 05 31 00. 1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following latest edition of the references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. The latest adopted edition of references and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". B. ACI 301 “Specifications for Concrete Construction.” C. ACI 117 “Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” D. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” E. International Building Code with State of California Amendments (CBC). F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 2 A. Unexposed Finish: A general-use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. B. Exposed Finish: A general-use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any). 1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: A. Formwork Design Requirements: Formwork products and execution specified herein are for finish surface quality only. 1. Design, layout and construction of formwork shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Design and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to CBC requirements and ACI 318 and ACI 347. 3. The resulting concrete shall conform to shapes, lines and dimensions indicated and required. 4. Tolerances for concrete shall be as specified in ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318 and ACI 347, unless otherwise specified or indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Timing: Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing form pattern layouts of all exposed exterior and interior concrete dimensioned to precisely locate grooves, form panel jointing, and similar features. Review and approval will not include form strength and adequacy. C. Record Document: Keep an accurate record of the dates of removal of forms, form shores and reshores, and furnish copies to the Architect. D. Submit product data for all proprietary items to be used on project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Construct forms according to ACI 347 and conforming to tolerances specified in ACI 301, as applicable, unless exceeded by code requirements or otherwise indicated or specified. B. Prior to construction of formwork for concrete beams and slabs above grade, Contractor shall conduct a meeting at the site to determine and define all cambers required for the project. The Architect, Structural Engineer of record, Contractor and Contractor's formwork installer shall be in attendance at this meeting. C. Formwork Designer's Qualifications: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, designer of formwork shall be a Civil or Structural Engineer registered to practice in the State of California. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 3 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to formwork construction requirements of the California Building Code (CBC) as amended and adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordination: Coordinate Work specified in this Section with other Sections which require placement of embedded products and provision of openings and recesses. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from the Architect before proceeding. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials for forms in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress. B. Store materials by methods that prevent damage and permit ready access for inspection and identification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Form lumber: WCLIB "Construction" grade or better, WWPA No. 1 or better, or equal. B. Form plywood: PS-1, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4" thick for exposed locations and not less than 5/8" thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled, Plywood having medium or high-density overlay is acceptable. C. Coated form plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent equal to "Nox- crete". D. Tube forms: Burke "SmoothTube", Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes", Alton Building Products "Sleek Seamless Standard Wall", or equal, type leaving no marks in concrete, 1-piece lengths for full required heights. E. Joist forms: Approved steel or molded plastic types as required. F. Special forms: For exposed integrally colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, or approved equal producing specified finish. G. Hardboard: For curved surfaces, tempered hardboard, Masonite Corp., or equal. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 4 H. Lumber: Douglas fir or Douglas fir-larch, grade appropriate for intended use, sound and undamaged straight edges, solid knots. I. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood molding at plywood or lumber forms; rigid plastic at steel, fiberglass and plastic forms. J. Embedded Nailers: Clear all heart redwood or pressure preservative treated (PPT) Douglas fir, edges reverse beveled to key into concrete. K. Form ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, or equal, not leaving metal within 1-1/2" of concrete surface leaving no hole larger than 1”. L. Form coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Burke Concrete Accessories, or "Cast-Off" by Sonneborn Building Products. Where form liners are used, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer. Form coating shall comply with applicable air quality regulations for volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). M. Form liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Labrado Forms, Symons, Greenstreak, or equal, types shown or directed, matching approved Sample. N. Steel forms: Symons or similar – https://daytonsuperior.com/brands/forming/symons O. Expanded metal: Stay Form by AMICO – https://amicoglobal.com P. Fiberglass: MFG Fiberglass Forms – https://mfgcwp.com PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP: A. Rigidly construct forms to prevent mortar leakage, sagging, displacement or bulging between studs. Use clean, sound, approved form material and coated with specified materials only, not oil. Provide backing on all plywood joints. B. Sides of all footings and grade beams shall be formed unless permission is obtained to place concrete directly against earth. Where this permission is granted, the footing or grade beam dimension shall be increased 3". Remove formwork prior to backfilling operations. 3.2 FORM ERECTION AND REMOVAL: A. Conform to ACI 301 and ACI 347 except as exceeded by the requirements of Code, regulatory agencies, or herein. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 5 B. Formwork Bracing and Shoring: Provide bracing and shores to ensure stability of formwork and accommodate all construction loads. Use form ties of sufficient strength and sufficient quantities to prevent formwork spreading. Maintain principal shores to support concrete until minimum required strength is achieved. C. Construction: Coat forms with the specified resin coating, not form oil. Construct forms to exact shapes, sizes, lines, and dimensions required to obtain level, plumb, and straight surfaces. Provide openings, offsets, keys, reglets, anchorages, recesses, moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds, drips, bulkheads, and all other required features. Make forms easily removable without hammering or prying against concrete. Space forms apart with metal spreaders. Construct forms to accurate alignment, location and grades, and provide against sagging, leakage of concrete mortar, or displacement occurring during and after placing of concrete. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchors in forms according to Shop Drawings and requirements for work of other sections. D. Camber: Place suitable jacks, wedges, or similar means to induce camber and to correct settlement in forms before and during concrete placing. Camber shall be as determined in pre-installation meeting specified above. In general, formwork shall be capable of accommodating camber of 1/8" per 10' of span plus 1/4". E. Corners and Angles: Provide 3/4" by 3/4" beveled chamfer strips for all exposed concrete corners and angles unless otherwise indicated. Form concealed concrete corners and angles square unless otherwise indicated. F. Reglets and Rebates: Form required reglets and rebates to receive frames, flashing, and other equipment. Obtain required dimensions, details, and precise positions for work to be installed under other sections and form concrete accordingly. G. Form Joints: Fill joints to produce smooth surfaces, intersections, and arises. Use polymer foam or equivalent fillers at joints and where forms abut or overlap existing concrete to prevent leakage of mortar. H. Recesses, Drips, and Profiles: Provide smooth milled wood or preformed rubber or plastic shapes of types shown and required. I. Cleanouts and Cleaning: Provide temporary openings in all wall forms and other vertical forms for cleaning and inspection. Clean forms and surfaces to receive concrete prior to placing. J. Screeds: Set screeds and establish level for tops of concrete slabs and leveling for finish surfaces. Shape surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Provide cradle, pad or base type screed supports for concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarders. K. Form Cleaning, General: Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection and placement proceeds. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to concrete placement. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 6 L. Formwork Reuse: Do not reuse wood and plywood forming materials which contact concrete, except as follows: 1. High density plywood may be cleaned and reused for exposed concrete. 2. Unfaced plywood may be reused for concealed concrete. 3. Steel and fiberglass forming materials may be cleaned and reused. M. Patching and Repairs: Patch tie holes with sheet metal patches and restore forms to like new condition prior to reuse. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. N. Form Removal: Do not remove concrete forms until concrete attains sufficient strength to support its own weight and all superimposed loads as determined by testing field cured concrete cylinders, but not sooner than specified in ACI 347. Load supporting forms may be removed when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28-day compressive strength but no sooner than 3 days, provided construction is reshored. Vertical formwork for cast-in-place concrete walls may be removed no sooner than 1 day following concrete placement, provided that contractor can demonstrate that no sloughing or sagging of concrete will occur. 1. Reshore structural members as specified below because of design requirements or construction conditions to permit successive construction. 2. Remove formwork progressively so unbalanced loads are not imposed on the structure. 3. Avoid damaging concrete surfaces during form removal. 4. Remove or snap off metal spreader ties inside wall surface. Cut nails and form ties off flush and leave surfaces level and clean. 5. Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact surfaces. 6. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface coloration. O. Reshoring: 1. Minimum reshoring shall be as per the requirements of ACI 347. Reshoring of not less than half the full required shoring shall be added under last placed floor over which full shoring is to be placed for the next floor above. Leave reshoring in place for at least 7 days after the floor above is placed, but in no case remove reshoring until next concrete placing has attained a compressive strength equal to 66% of that required for the 28-day age as determined by control test cylinders specified hereinafter. 2. Record: Maintain a form and shoring removal record. 3. Contractor shall submit shoring/reshoring plans and calculations for review and approval. Calculations and plans shall be stamped and signed by a licensed civil or structural engineer in the State of California. Reshoring loads to the lower floors shall be consistent with the design loads specified in the construction documents and with the acquired strength of the lower floors based on the time they have been allowed to cure before being loaded. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 7 P. Shoring for Tributary Loads: Set temporary shoring for structural steel beams supporting cast-in-place concrete slabs. Such shoring is not required where beams are partially or totally encased with concrete nor for steel beams supporting concrete or masonry walls resting on the beams. 3.3 FORMWORK TOLERANCES: A. Deflection: Limit deflection of forming surfaces from concrete pressure to L/240. B. Finish Lines: Position formwork to maintain hardened concrete finish lines within following permissible deviations. 1. Variation from Plumb: In 10’-0” 1/4 inch In any story or 20’-0” 3/8 inch In 40’-0” or more 3/4 inch 2. Variation from Level or Grades Indicated: In 10’-0” 1/4 inch In any bay or 20’-0” maximum 3/8 inch In 40’-0” or more 3/4 inch 3. Cross-Sectional Dimensions: Minus 1/4 inch Plus 1/2 inch C. Building Lines: Variation of linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions: 1. In any bay or 10'-0" maximum: 1/2 inch 2. In 40'-0" or more: 1 inch D. Slab Openings: Variations in size and location of sleeves and slab openings shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 3.4 SURVEY AND ADJUSTMENT: A. Check forms before and during placement of concrete, using an instrument, and make corrections as work proceeds. 3.5 EMBEDDED PIPING AND ROUGH HARDWARE: A. Comply with ACI. Where work of other sections require openings for passage of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other inserts in the concrete, obtain all dimensions and other information. All necessary pipe sleeves, anchors, or other required inserts shall be DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 8 accurately installed as part of the work of other sections, according to following requirements. B. Openings: Size and locate formed openings, depressions, recesses and chases to accommodate products to be applied to, built into and pass through concrete Work. Coordinate size, location and placement of inserts, embedded products, openings and recesses with Work specified in other Sections. C. Anchors and Other Devices: Set and build into concrete formwork anchorage devices and other embedded products required for Work to be attached to or supported by concrete elements. D. Locating Embedded Products and Openings: Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and templates to set embedded products. E. Conduits or Pipes: Locate so as not to reduce strength of concrete. In no case place pipes, other than conduits, in a slab 4-1/2" thick or less. Conduit buried in a concrete slab shall not have an outside diameter greater than 1/3 the slab thickness nor be placed below the bottom reinforcing steel or over top reinforcing steel. Space conduit a minimum of 5 diameters apart. F. Sleeves: Pipe sleeves may pass through slabs or walls if not exposed to rusting or other deterioration and are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel. Provide sleeves of diameter large enough to pass any hub or coupling on pipe, including any insulation. 3.6 PATCHING: A. Schedule: Patch forming and tie holes immediately after form removal. B. Cleaning: Clean surface of all loose materials and soiling. C. Patching: Patch all holes and depressions with grouting gun and grout mix of one part cement and 2-1/2 parts mortar sand 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspection: Obtain inspection and approval of forms per CBC Table 1705.3 Item 12 before placing structural concrete. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS S0.03 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Reinforcing mesh for cast-in-place concrete. 3. Reinforcing Bars for masonry. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00. 2. Cast in Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. 3. Embedded Items in Concrete: Section 03 30 00 4. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04 22 00. 1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. The latest adopted edition of references and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” B. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” C. ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.” D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice. E. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. F. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature G. American Welding Society (AWS) – AWS D1.4, D1.1 “Structural Welding Code.” H. International Building Code with State of California amendments (CBC). DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit including complete layouts, sections, and details for congested conditions, typical bending diagrams and offsets, splice lengths and locations, proposed layout where vertical and horizontal bars intersect, and wherever welding is proposed, detailed to conform to AWS and CBC requirements. After approval of initial submission, subsequent submittals may be waived. B. Product Data: Provide product data for all mechanical couplers, spacers, chairs, sleeves, and other items related to the reinforcing detailing. C. Certifications: If steel is to be welded, submit certifications signed by AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) of prequalified welding procedures, qualifications of welding procedures unless prequalified, qualification of welding operators, and qualification of welders. D. Chemical Analysis: Provide for bars to be welded, in accordance with CBC Table 1705.3 and ACI 318 26.6.1.2. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Quality Control: Refer to Section 01 40 00 for general requirements. Compliance requirements of ACI 318 Section 26.6.1.2 shall be met. B. Qualification of Welds, Welding Operators, and Welders: Comply with applicable Building Code standard. Perform welding procedure qualification, except for prequalified procedures, as required by AWS D1.4, prior to executing any welding of reinforcing steel. 1. Only AWS Certified Welding Inspectors shall be used for tests and qualifications associated with welding of reinforcing steel. 2. Only AWS qualified welders or welding operators shall perform welding of reinforcing steel. C. Welding of reinforcing shall be in conformance with AWS & CBC. Do not weld reinforcing without approval of the structural engineer. D. Install reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 117, CRSI & CBC. E. Coordination: Coordinate Work specified in this Section with other Sections which require placement of embedded products and provision of openings and recesses. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect and Structural Engineer. Coordinate reinforcing adjustments are required to accommodate embedded items with Structural Engineer before proceeding. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 3 1.5 MARKING AND SHIPPING: A. Bundle bars, tag with identification, and transport and store so as not to damage any material. Use metal tags indicating size, length and other marking shown on placement drawings. Maintain tags after bundles are broken. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIAL: A. Provide and install an additional 2% of the total rebar quantity for the project in addition to the quantities shown on drawings. This additional steel shall be installed during construction, in sizes and locations as directed. Provide unit price for the purpose of adjusting contract price to reflect quantity of extra material actually used. All unused material shall be credited to the owner based upon the agreed unit prices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Strength performance requirements for use as noted in the drawings. B. Reinforcing bars for welding: ASTM A706, Grade 60. C. Welded steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A1064 as indicated on the structural drawings. D. Shear studs: Low carbon steel, C1015 in accordance with ASTM A108. E. Stud welding method in accordance with AWS D1.1. F. Tie wire: ASTM A1064, Annealed copper-bearing steel, 16 gauge minimum. G. Chairs and similar support items: 1. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers: Wire-bar-type devices, complying with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Provide size and shape as required for strength and support of reinforcement during reinforcement installation and concrete placement. a. Supports at Slab on Grade: Provide devices with load-bearing pads or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs, to prevent puncture of vapor retarder or provide precast concrete block bar supports of equal or greater strength to specified concrete. b. Corrosion Resistance: i. Provide plastic coated, plastic-tipped (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel types at exposed-to-view concrete surfaces. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 4 ii. Provide only stainless steel (CRSI Class 2) at exterior exposed surfaces to be painted. H. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.4, Table 5.1 for low hydrogen electrodes, E9018 for Grade 60 steel. I. Mechanical Couplers or Splice Devices: Lenton, Barlock, Cadweld conforming to ACI 318. 2.2 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS: A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel. B. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are subject to rejection. Use only tested and approved bar materials. C. Welding: Use only ASTM 706 steel where welding is proposed. Perform welding, where shown or approved, by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 using specified low-hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6" each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is prohibited. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of all loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds found defective with chisel and replace with proper welding. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with the Code. No welds shall be made at bends in reinforcing bars. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4. D. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize fully completed reinforcing assemblies in accordance with ASTM A123 where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING: A. Provide additional reinforcing bars at wall and slab openings as required. Before placing bars, and again before concrete is placed, clean bars of loose mill scale, oil, or any other coating that might destroy or reduce bond. B. Securing in Place: Accurately place bars and wire tie in precise position where bars cross. Bend ends of wire ties away from the forms. Wire tie bars to corners of ties and stirrups. Support bars according to CRSI 63 using approved accessories and chairs. Place precast concrete cubes with embedded wire ties to support reinforcing steel bars in concrete placed on grade and in footings. Use care not to damage vapor barriers where they occur. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 5 C. Coordination: Locate reinforcement to accommodate embedded products and formed openings and recesses. All embedded items shall be secured to the reinforcing to prevent movement of displacement. D. Clearances: Maintain minimum clear distances between reinforcing bars and face of concrete as indicated on plans or directed. E. Splices: Do not splice reinforcing bars at the points of maximum stress except where indicated. Lap splices as shown or required to develop the full strength or stress of bars. Stagger splices in horizontal wall bars at least 24" longitudinally in alternate bars and opposite faces. F. Splice Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Wire Fabric Placement: Place fabric in sheets as long as practical, lapping adjoining pieces at least one full mesh plus 2”, 9”, or 1.5 ld, whichever is greater and tie with 16 gage wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Extend fabric to within 1- inch of edge at slabs on grade. Cut mesh at expansion joints and full depth control joints. H. Field Welding of Bars: As specified for fabrication. I. Maintaining Bars In Position: Take adequate precautions to assure that reinforcing position and spacing is maintained during placement of concrete. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Supervision: Perform work to this section under the supervision of a capable superintendent. B. Inspection: Obtain inspection and approval of reinforcing before concrete is placed. C. Welding Inspection. Whether welding is done in the shop or at the site, perform welding of reinforcing bars under inspection of the Testing Laboratory Welding Inspector. All reinforcing welding shall have continuous inspection. D. Notify structural engineer approximately 3 days prior to completion of placement. 3.3 CORRECTIONS DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. Corrections During Concrete Placement: Maintain reinforcing steel workers during placement of concrete for resetting reinforcement displaced by runways, workers and other causes. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 6 3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK: A. Defective Reinforcement Work: The following shall be considered defective and may be ordered to be removed and reconstructed at no change in Contract Time or Sum. 1. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings. 2. Bars injured due to bending or straightening. 3. Bars heated or bent. 4. Reinforcement not placed in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 5. Rusty or oily bars. 6. Bars exposed in surface of concrete. END OF SECTION S0.04 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes: 1. Furnishing, placing, patching, and initial curing of cast-in-place concrete unless otherwise specified. 2. Grout and drypack, except as otherwise specified. 3. Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts. 4. Vapor barrier under interior floor slabs on grade. 5. Finishing and final curing of cast-in-place concrete. 6. Waterstops including testing. 7. Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in- place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete all Work. 8. Slurry concrete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Preparation and grading of earth subgrade, Section 31 20 00. 2. Concrete Paving: Concrete for pedestrian and vehicular traffic, Section 32 13 13. 3. Furnishing, erection, and removal of forms, Section 03 10 00. 4. Furnishing and placing reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 20 00. 5. Fiberous Concrete Reinforcing, Section 03 24 00. 6. Reinforcing bars for masonry, Section 04 22 00. 7. Concrete Unit Masonry, Section 04 22 00. 8. Cement fill in metal stair pans, Section 05 50 00. 1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Latest adopted edition of references and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. B. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2 C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 211.2 – Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete. D. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. E. ACI 302.1 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. F. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. G. ACI 304.2 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. H. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting. I. ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting. J. ACI 308 – Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete. K. ACI 309 Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. L. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. M. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. N. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. O. American Welding Society (AWS) AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Bars. P. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) - Concrete Plant Standards and Truck Mixer and Agitator Standards. Q. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) – Manual of Standard Practice. R. CRSI – Placing Reinforcing Bars. S. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) - Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion (Guideline No. 03730) . T. IRCI - Guide for Selecting Application Methods for Repair of Concrete Surfaces (Guideline No. 03731). U. International Building Code (IBC) with State of California Amendments (CBC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3 B. Shop Drawings: Submit for structural concrete and concrete slabs showing dimensioned locations, types of construction and expansion joints, and method of keying. C. Mix Designs: Submit mix designs for review and approval. Also refer to Section 1.05. D. Product Data: Proprietary admixtures, curing compounds, hardeners and sealers. 1. Indicate compatibility of curing compounds and floor sealer with bond breaker for tilt-up concrete and finish materials to be applied to concrete. 2. Indicate compatibility of curing compounds, hardeners and sealers with materials used for installation of applied flooring. E. Product Data: Submit the coloring admix manufacturer's technical data for products, methods, and color control procedures. F. Certificates: Certify that materials meet requirements of paragraph "Quality Assurance". G. Delivery Tickets: With each transit truck, provide delivery ticket, signed by an authorized representative of the batch plant, containing all information required by ASTM C94, as well as time batched, type and brand of cement, cement content, maximum size of aggregate and total water content. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Compliance with Regulations: All materials shall comply with the current rules and regulations of the local air quality management district, with the rules regarding volatile organic compounds, and with FDA rules and regulations for dangerous substances in construction products. B. Concrete Manufacturer: Furnish concrete from licensed commercial ready-mix concrete plants conforming to ASTM C94 and approved by Building Official. Requirements herein govern when exceeding ASTM C94. C. Allowable Tolerances: Construct concrete conforming to the tolerances specified in ACI 117 "Recommended Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials", as applicable, unless exceeded by requirements of regulatory agencies or otherwise indicated or specified. D. Testing Agency Services: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to conduct tests and perform other services specified for quality control during construction. E. Source Quality Control: Refer to the following paragraphs for specific procedures. Concrete materials which, by previous tests or actual service, have shown conformance may be used without testing when so approved by the Architect and Building Official. Testing Laboratory shall perform following conformance testing. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 1. Portland Cement: Furnish Certificate of Compliance acceptable to Architect and Building Official, showing conformance with requirements specified; otherwise, the Testing Laboratory shall test each 250 barrels of cement in accordance with ASTM C150. 2. Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Test the aggregate before and after concrete mix is designed and whenever character of aggregate varies or source of material is changed. Include a sieve analysis. Obtain samples of aggregates at the dry batching or ready-mix concrete plant in accordance with ASTM D75 and perform tests for the properties listed in the following table: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Physical Properties, units Test Method Minimum values Sieve analysis ASTM C136 Per ASTM C33 Section 6 for fine aggregate and Table 2 for coarse aggregate. Organic impurities ASTM C40 Fine aggregate not darker than reference standard color Soundness ASTM C88 Loss after 5 cycles not more than 8 percent of coarse aggregate, nor more than 10 percent of fine aggregate Abrasion ASTM C131 For coarse aggregate weight loss not more than 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions, 42 percent after 500 revolutions Deleterious materials ASTM C33 Per ASTM C33 Table 1 for fine aggregate and Table 3 for coarse aggregate Materials finer than No. 200 sieve ASTM C117 Not over 1 percent for gravel, 1.5 percent for crushed aggregate Reactivity potential ASTM C227, C289, C342 Ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity not to exceed 1.0. Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 California sand equivalent values operating range not below 71 percent 3. Lightweight Aggregates: Test the lightweight aggregates before mix is designed and whenever the character of aggregate varies or source is changed in accordance with ASTM C330. Include a sieve analysis and report on unit weights, deleterious substances, unburned or underburned lumps, loss on ignition, soundness, and staining materials. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5 1.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS: Testing Laboratory shall design concrete mixes for concrete requiring 28-day compressive strength exceeding 2,500 psi. Contractor shall bear all costs for concrete mix designs. All mix designs shall be signed and sealed by a Civil Engineer registered in the State of California. A. Strength Requirements: Design mixes for structural concrete for minimum 28-day compressive strengths required by Drawings and Specifications. All mix designs for structural concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI 301. If trial batches are used, the trial batch strength for each mix shall exceed indicated or specified strength by an amount based on the standard deviations of strength test records according to ACI 318. B. Normal Weight Concrete Mix Designs: Design all mixes for workability and durability of concrete. Control the mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete”, and ACI 318. Make adjustments in cement content required for concrete strengths at Contractor's expense and do not exceed 0.60 absolute water-cement or cement plus fly ash ratio by weight. Do not use calcium chloride or any admixture containing such material. Admixtures containing a material releasing nitrates in solution are limited to 0.06 percent by weight for the chloride ion. C. Maximum Aggregate Sizes: Not exceeding 3/4 of minimum clear space between bars and between bars and forms, nor larger than 1/5 of least dimensions between the forms. Design the mixes with 3/4" maximum size, except maximum 1-1/2" size for foundations and maximum 3/8" size at congested reinforcing or thin sections, when approved by the Architect. D. Light Weight Structural Concrete: Design mixes based on field experience, and control mix in accordance with ACI 211.2, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete”. Design for air-dry density of 110 pounds per cubic foot maximum. With each mix design submit test reports showing concretes covered by the mix designs meet shrinkage test requirements specified under Article “Field Quality Control” hereinafter or include certified test reports showing conformance as furnished by the ready-mix concrete manufacturer. E. Air Content: All formed normal weight concrete may contain an air-entraining agent producing air content of 1.5% to 3% by volume and adjusted for weather conditions. All interior slabs shall have a maximum air content of 1.5 percent. F. Pumped Concrete: Design concrete mixes specifically for pump placing with dry loose volume of fine aggregates not more than 47 percent of total aggregates. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver all materials in timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Store materials by methods that prevent damage and permit ready access for inspection and identification. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6 C. Runoff: Prevent run off of water contaminated by construction agents and chemicals from soiling existing surfaces and from contaminating existing and future landscape areas. 1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS: A. Do not place concrete during rain or adverse weather conditions without means to prevent all damage. Conform to requirements specified hereinafter whenever concrete placement is required during cold or hot weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali, or Type V when in contact with soils. Do not change brand or source without prior approval. B. Aggregates: 1. Standard weight aggregates: ASTM C33, from approved pits, free from vegetable matter and of opaline, feldspar, or siliceous magnesium substances; all washed, clean, hard, fine-grained sound crushed rock or gravel; not over 5 percent by weight of flat, thin, elongated, friable, or laminated pieces (pieces having major dimension over 5 times average dimension) or more than 2 percent by weight of shale or cherty material. 2. Lightweight aggregates: ASTM C330, Ridgelite, Rocklite, or equal, approved kiln expanded shale or clay having fire sealed surface, coarse aggregate not produced by crushing, dry loose weight maximum 38 pcf, maximum 3/4” size, vacuum or thermally fully saturated for pumped concrete. The absolute volume of coarse aggregate in concrete mix not exceeding 8.8 cubic feet. C. Admixtures: 1. Chemical (Water Reducing) Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, D, or E. Only one brand. When used, are subject to approval of Architect, and should reduce the mixing water at least 5 percent without entraining air in excess of 2 percent by volume. If the water reducing agent entrains more than 2 percent air, the water reduction shall be at least 10 percent, but in no case shall the water reducing agent entrain air in excess of 4 percent. 2. Air-entraining admix: ASTM C260. 3. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class F or C Fly Ash, 100 pounds maximum per cubic yard, containing 1 percent or less carbon. Fly ash shall not be used in excess of 20 percent by weight of total cement quantity. 4. Super-Plasticizers (High Range Water Reducers): ASTM C494, Type F or G. Master Builders "Rheobuild", Euclid "Eucon 37" or equal, capable of producing concrete which can be placed at 6-8 inch slump without segregation, capable of maintaining slump within 2" of that initially mixed for 90 minutes, and of DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7 maintaining concrete temperature within 2 degrees F. from time of batching for 90 minutes minimum. 5. Color Admixture: L.M. Scofield Company "Chromix", "Colorfull Concrete Color" by Admixtures, Inc., Irwindale, Calif., both standard and retarder types as required for the field placing conditions, or prior approved equal. D. Water: From potable domestic source. E. Curing Materials: 1. Curing, Hardening and Sealing Materials, General: Provide materials suitable for concrete finish and not detrimental to materials to be applied to concrete. Materials shall be compatible with concrete admixtures, shall be recommended by manufacturer for intended use and shall comply with applicable air quality requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 2. Liquid Curing compound: ASTM C309, Type I, Class B, W.R. Meadows 1100 Series, Master Builders "Masterkure-N-Seal W", or equal, complying with Rule 1113 of the South Coast Air Quality Management District and Federal Air Quality Regulation 40 CFR 52.254. 3. Curing sheet: ASTM C171, non-staining white types. 4. Curing, Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Sonneborn Sonosil, water- based inorganic silicate-base compound, to cure, harden and dustproof concrete, VOC-compliant. 5. Surface Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Sonneborn Lapidolith concrete hardening compound, chemically-active solution which interacts with free lime in concrete to form dense, impervious wearing surface, VOC- compliant. F. Vapor barrier: 1. Vapor Retarder must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E96 with 0.04 Perms or lower. b. Water Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745 meeting or Class C minimum. c. Thickness of Retarder (plastic): ACI 302.1R-04 not less than 10 mils. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Stego Wrap 10-mil Vapor Retarder by Stego Industries LLC. b. Griffolyn T-85 by Reef Industries. c. Moistop Ultra by Fortifiber Industries. 3. General Installation: a. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers tape. b. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. c. Repair all damaged areas prior to pouring of slab. G. Non-shrink grout: Conform to Corps of Engineers CRC-C 621, ASTM C1107 and as follows: 1. Metallic for concealed areas: Master Builders "Embeco 885", or equal, non-gas- forming and free of oxidizing catalysts and inorganic accelerators, used as dry DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 8 or damp pack, or mixed to a 20-second flow, without segregation or bleeding at any temperature between 45 degrees F and 100 degrees F. Working time 30 minutes or more. 2. Non-metallic for exposed areas: Master Builders "Masterflow 928", or Euclid "Euco Hi-Flow Grout" with same characteristics as specified for concealed areas. 3. Epoxy grout where indicated: Multi-component, premeasured, fast-curing combination of thermosetting resins and inert fillers, Master Builders "Masterflow 648CP Plus", Sikadur 42 Industrial Group-Pak by Sika Chemical Corporation, or Euclid "Euco High Strength Grout". H. Drypack: Field mixture of 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate mixed to a damp consistency such that a ball molded in the hands will stick together and hold its shape. At Contractor's option, the specified admixture may be added for increased workability at lower water/cement ratio. In lieu of field mixing, Contractor may use factory mixed drypack material, such as Master Builders "Set Grout" or Euclid "Euco Dry Pack Grout". I. Expansion Joint Filler: Asphalt impregnated fiber or non extruding foam type, conforming to ASTM D1751 and D1752, W.R. Meadows “Sealtight”, or equal. J. Construction Joint Materials: "Key-Kold" or "Kwik-Joint", of profiles indicated. K. Bonding Agent: "Weld-Crete", manufactured by Larsen Products Co., Master Builders "Concresive", or equal. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Furnish ready-mixed concrete from an approved commercial off-site plant. Conform to ASTM C94, except materials, testing, and mix designs as specified herein. Use transit mixer trucks equipped with automatic devices for recording number of revolutions of drum. B. Admixtures: All approved admixtures shall be introduced into the concrete at the batch plant. Field additions are not acceptable. S0.05 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9 C. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at point and time of placing does not exceed the following slumps when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessary for workability required by part of structure being cast. SLUMP AND WATER/CEMENT RATIOS Part of Structure Maximum Slump Inches* Maximum Water- Cement Ratio Footings, foundation walls, and mass concrete, not reinforced 4 0.55 Slabs on grade, reinforced and non-reinforced 4 0.45 Reinforced concrete walls 4 0.5 Concrete fill on metal deck 4 0.55 All other concrete 4 0.5 *If super-plasticizers are used, slumps may be 6"-8" for all concrete, with water-cement ratio unchanged or lower than slumps without admixture. 2.3 SLURRY CONCRETE: A. Slurry concrete shall conform to requirements of this section for regular concrete, except that testing will not be required. Slurry concrete shall contain not less than 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Aggregate may be material selected from excavation, free from organic matter, or imported fill, conforming to the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 80 - 100 3/4" 60 - 100 3/8" 50 - 100 No. 4 40 - 80 No. 100 10 - 40 B. Water shall be added to produce a fluid, workable mix that will flow and can be pumped without segregation of aggregate. Materials shall be mechanically mixed until the cement and water are thoroughly dispersed. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACING: A. Remove all free water from forms before concrete is deposited. Remove hardened concrete, debris, and foreign materials from interior surfaces of forms, exposed reinforcing, and from surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. B. Wetting: Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks. Wet other materials sufficiently to reduce adsorption and to help maintain concrete workability. C. Earth Subgrade: Dampen 24 hours before placing concrete, but do not muddy. Re-roll where necessary for smoothness and remove loose material. D. Gravel Fill: Recompact disturbed gravel and bring to correct elevation. E. Sand Beds or Subslab Drainage Fill: Recompact disturbed material and bring to correct elevation. F. Vapor Barrier: Install under interior floor slabs on grade. Lap joints 6" in the direction of concrete spreading and tape seal. Seal the joints at walls and around penetrations with tape. Cover barrier with 2" layer of clean damp sand. G. Screeds: Set screeds at walls and maximum 8-foot centers between. Set to provide level floor. Check with an instrument level, transit, or laser during placing operation to maintain level floor. H. Screeds over Vapor Barrier: Use weighted pad or cradle type screeds and do not drive stakes through the vapor barrier. Check with an instrument level, transit, or laser. I. Expansion Joint Filler: Install where slabs abut buildings and elsewhere as indicated. Install full depth of concrete with top level with finished surface of concrete. J. Metal Floor Decking: Verify that decking joints are sealed and there are no openings or voids that will permit concrete leakage. K. Composite Steel Beams: Provide shores for tributary construction loads to floor and roof beams as required, or camber the beams as approved by Architect. 3.2 CONCRETE PLACING: A. Conveying and Placing: Comply with ACI 304. Do not place concrete until the reinforcing steel, embedded items, forms, or metal decking have been approved. Do not use aluminum tubes or any aluminum equipment for pumping concrete, nor allow concrete to free fall from its point of release at mixer, hoppers, tremies, or conveying equipment more than 5 feet for concealed concrete and 3 feet for exposed concrete. Deposit concrete in 18” maximum lifts within 90 minutes after water is first added to the batch and so that the surface is kept level throughout, a minimum being permitted to flow DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 11 from one portion to another. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of materials. 1. Where new concrete is placed against or on old or existing concrete, apply bonding agent to properly prepared surface of old concrete prior to placement of new concrete. Prepare surface in accordance with ICRI. 2. Exception: When using super-plasticizers, the free fall, horizontal layer thickness and time limitations may be doubled. B. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. C. Protection: Ensure that reinforcement, embedded products, joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Joints in Concrete: Locate construction joints only where approved, and obtain prior approval for points of stoppage of any pour. Clean and roughen the surface of construction joints by removing the entire surface and exposing 1/4" amplitude of clean aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix by sandblasting, chipping, use of an approved surface retarder, or equal. Water and keep hardened concrete wet for not less than 24 hours and slush with portland cement slurry just before placing joining concrete. Cover horizontal surfaces of existing or previously placed and hardened concrete with a 2" thick layer of fresh concrete less 50% of coarse aggregate just before balance of concrete is placed. E. Vertical Elements: Stop placement of concrete in walls and columns 1-1/2" below bottom of beams or supported slabs. Stop placement at sills and heads of wall openings in the same manner. Allow concrete in vertical elements to be in place at least 2 hours and until vertical settlement has ceased before placing concrete for floor framing. F. Compacting: Compact each layer of the concrete as placed with mechanical vibrators or equivalent equipment. Transmit vibration directly to concrete and in no case through the forms unless approved. Accomplish thorough compaction. Supplement by rodding or spading by hand adjacent to forms. Compact concrete into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Recompact deep sections with congestion due to reinforcing steel as required. G. Operation of Vibrators: Do not horizontally transport concrete in forms with vibrators nor allow vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing. Push vibrators vertically into the preceding layers that are still plastic and slowly withdraw, producing maximum obtainable density in concrete without creating voids or segregation. In no case disturb DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 12 concrete that has partially set. Vibrate at intervals not exceeding two-thirds the effective visible vibration diameter of the submerged vibrator. Avoid excessive vibration that causes segregation. Use and type of vibrators shall conform to ACI 309 "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete". H. Correction of Segregation: Before placing next layer of concrete, and at the top of last placement for vertical elements, remove concrete containing excess water or fine aggregate or showing deficiency of coarse aggregate and fill the space with compacted concrete of correct proportions. I. Waterproof Membranes: Perform work adjacent to waterproof membranes to prevent damage to membranes. Arrange work so that membrane is left unprotected for minimum period of time, as approved. Prior to placing concrete, inspect the membrane and arrange for repair to all damage which may have occurred. J. Concrete Encased Columns: Clean columns as specified for cleaning other steel in contact with concrete. When concrete is not carried to structure above, stop concrete perpendicular to column axis at the same elevation on all parts of all columns in the space. Float top neatly to column. K. Slabs: 1. Float Finish: Place, consolidate, strike off and level concrete slab to proper elevation. Use highway straightedge, bull float or darby. Remove all bleed water. After the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has disappeared, the surface shall be floated, at least twice, to a uniform sandy texture. Remainder of finishing operations shall be as specified in Section 03 34 50 for each type of surface. 2. On-Grade Slabs: Place with maximum 40-foot edge dimension. Generally locate joints on column lines, exact locations as directed or approved. 3. On-Grade Slab Construction and Contraction Joints: Use types as indicated at column lines intermediate locations. 4. Expansion Joints: Conform to details and approved submittal. Provide expansion joint filler finished flush with slab surface except for those joints shown to be sealed with sealant. Conform to Section 07 92 00 where sealant sealed joints are shown or specified, including the polymer joint filler, backing, and bond breaker. 5. Control Joints: Provide for concrete slabs as indicated. At Contractor's option, "Soff-Cut" saw may be used to depth of 1-1/4" immediately providing spalling or undercutting of the concrete does not occur, and in no case shall slab reinforcement be cut or damaged. Conventional saws shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate to 1/4 slab thickness. Complete sawing of joints within 12 hours after finishing is completed. If early sawing causes undercutting or washing of the concrete, delay the sawing operation and repair the damaged areas. The saw cut shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the true joint alignment. Discontinue sawing if a crack develops ahead of a saw cut. Immediately after each joint is sawed, thoroughly clean the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface. Respray surfaces treated with curing compound DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 13 which are damaged during the sawing operations as soon as the water disappears. Protect joints in a manner to prevent the curing compound from entering the joints. 3.3 COLD WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Conform to ACI 306 and the following requirements. B. Normal Concrete: When the temperature is below 40 degrees F. the temperature of the concrete placed in the forms shall be at least 60 degrees F. When the temperature is below 30 degrees F. the temperature of the concrete as mixed shall be 65 degrees F. In all cases, when the daily average temperature is below 40 degrees F. the concrete shall be kept at 55 degrees F. for 72 hours and then allowed to drop uniformly to the air temperature over the next 24 hours. 1. Concrete temperature shall be measured by placing a thermometer 2" from the top of the concrete being placed. C. Air-entrained concrete shall be kept at the above temperature for 27 hours and above freezing for an additional 72 hours. D. No calcium chloride shall be used to accelerate hardening of concrete. Contractor to certify that any additive used does not contain calcium chloride. E. If low temperature accelerating admixture is proposed, adjust concrete mix as required and obtain approval of Architect. F. All concrete materials, reinforcement, forming materials and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free of frost. G. The covering or other protection used in connection with the curing shall remain in place and intact for at least 24 hours. H. The work shall be protected from the elements, flowing water, and defacements of any nature during the construction operations. 3.4 HOT WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Conform to ACI 305 and the following requirements. B. Take extra care to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed, and to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 90 degrees F., shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing, and start curing as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage. Using retarding admixture at 85F or higher. C. Concrete placement temperatures shall be controlled by the Contrac tor and shall not be limited to: DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 14 1. Shading and cooling the aggregate; 2. Avoiding use of hot cement; 3. Cooling mixing water by additions of ice; 4. Insulating water supply lines and tanks; and 5. Insulating mixer drums or cooling them with sprays or wet burlap. D. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4-inch height. E. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Grout cleaned finish: Apply to surfaces indicated after all contiguous surfaces are accessible; do not clean as work progresses. a. Prepare grout using 1 part portland cement, 1-1/2 parts fine sand, and enough water to produce a mixture with consistency of thick paint. Achieve grout color matching concrete surface color by blending normal and white portland cements. b. Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture evenly by brush or spray. Scrub surface immediately after grout application to fill minor air bubbles, using cork float or stone, and remove excess grout while it is still plastic. After initial drying, rub surface vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for not less than 36 hours. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 3.5 FINISHING SLABS: A. Interior Floor and Exterior Slab Finishes and Tolerances, General: See SCHEDULE in Section 3.17 of this specification for finishes. Achieve flat, level planes except where slopes or grades are indicated. Tolerances shall be in accordance with FF (flatness) and FL (levelness) as defined in ACI 117. B. Finishing Operations, General: Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1. C. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. D. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. E. Final floating: Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 15 1. Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. 2. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. F. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. 1. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. 2. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not over-trowel. 3. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. 4. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering system. G. Finishes: 1. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile on mortar bed, and paint or another thin film-finish coating system. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2. Trowel and Burnished Finish: In warehouse storage and materials handling areas, at exposed concrete floor slab, trowel finish as specified above with burnishing in compliance with Class 5 requirements according to ACI 301, without topping. 3. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply a non-slip broom finish to troweled finish at exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. H. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Architect or Structural Engineer. 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1-inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1- inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 16 compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to Architect or Structural Engineer while bonding compound is still active: a. Dry-pack mix: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND SEALING: A. Curing, General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Use curing method compatible with applied finishes, waterproofing and other coatings. When coatings or waterproofing are to be applied to concrete or when concrete is intended to remain exposed, use moist curing (sheet) method only. See Schedule at end of this Section. 1. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days, or as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply curing compounds after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 4. Apply sealer hardener compounds as scheduled at end of this Section. B. Application of Liquid and Dust-On Agents: Apply agents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Curing, Floors and Slabs: Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Floor slabs to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic tile or stone tile: Curing compound or moist cure. 2. Floor slabs to receive adhesively-applied resilient flooring or carpet: Moist cure or curing/hardening and dustproofing compound (compatible with flooring adhesives) when acceptable to Architect or Structural Engineer. Coordinate moist curing with flooring application requirements and provide sealer as necessary to avoid detrimental affect of dusting. 3. Floor slabs to receive waterproof membrane or thinset ceramic tile: Moist cure only. 4. Floor slabs to remain exposed and receive only light traffic (electrical rooms and equipment rooms): Curing, hardening and dustproofing compound or moist cure. If moist cure, apply one coat of surface hardening and dustproofing compound as specified for other exposed floor slabs. 5. Floor slabs to remain exposed and receive normal pedestrian and light vehicle traffic: Moist cure. Apply specified sealers or surface hardening compound as scheduled at end of this Section. 6. Equipment pads and bases: Match surrounding floor. S0.06 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 17 3.7 PATCHING FORMED CONCRETE: A. Remove fins, projections, and offsets. Cut out rock pockets, honeycomb, and all other defects to sound concrete, with edges of cuts straight and back-beveled. Dampen cut- outs and edges, and scrub with neat portland cement slurry just before patching, or an apply approved epoxy concrete adhesive. B. Saturate form tie holes with water and fill voids and patches with flush smooth-finished mortar of same mix as concrete (less coarse aggregate), cure, and dry. 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of Work specified in other Sections, after such Work is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.9 GROUTING AND DRYPACKING: A. Install as indicated or required. Where grouting and drypacking is part of the work of other sections, it shall conform to the following requirements, as applicable. B. Drypacking: Mix materials thoroughly with minimum amount of water. Pre -saturate surfaces to receive dry pack for 24-hours prior to placement, install drypack by forcing and rodding to fill voids and provide complete bearing under plates. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and cure with damp burlap or liquid curing compound. C. Non-Shrink Grouting: 1. Mixing: Mix the approved non-shrink grout material with sufficient water per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Application: Surfaces to receive the non-shrink grout shall be clean, and shall be pre-saturated thoroughly 24-hours before placing the mortar. Before grouting, surfaces to be in contact shall be roughened and cleaned thoroughly, all loose particles shall be removed and the surface flushed thoroughly with neat cement grout immediately before the grouting mortar is placed. Place fluid grout from one side only and puddle, chain, or pump for complete filling of voids; do not remove the dams or forms until grout attains initial set. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, and cure as recommended by grout manufacturer. DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 18 3.10 SITE CONCRETE WORK: A. Use bituminous type joint filler. Cure all concrete for at least 10 days with liquid curing compound or sheet material except as otherwise specified. Construct all site concrete of 2,000 psi concrete unless otherwise indicated or specified. Provide reinforcing bars or mesh only where indicated. Conform to requirements specified hereinbefore for slab finishing and curing as applicable. B. Concrete Curbs: Provide 1/2" thick expansion joints, at beginning and at end of curves, intersections, and 20-foot intervals between, set plumb, square, and to same profile as the curbs. Edge curb tops to 1/2" radius and vertical joints to 1/4" radius. Apply smooth finish followed by fine hair brush finish. C. Concrete Gutters: Provide 1/2" thick expansion joints as above for curbs and apply a light broom finish with a 3" wide steel trowel finish at flow line. D. Combination Curb and Gutter: As above for curbs and gutters, including expansion joints, 3" troweled flow line at base of curb. E. Concrete Walks: Provide 1/2" expansion joints as specified for curbs and where walks abut rigid structures, aligned with joints in curbs where adjoining, and apply light broom finish perpendicular to traffic direction. Score walks as shown or directed. F. Control Joints: Provide sawed joints for concrete walks and exterior concrete pavement as indicated. Use "Zip Strip" as distributed by S.C.A. Construction Supply, Santa Fe Springs, Calif., or equal only where specifically indicated. Install tops of the joints flush with the concrete surface and depth of joint a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of slab. 3.11 SLURRY CONCRETE: A. Slurry concrete shall be used as fill or backfill where indicated, and wherever excavations are carried below design depths without approval. Slurry concrete shall be placed within 1 hour after mixing, and shall be placed in manner that will prevent voids in, or segregation of, the concrete. B. Backfilling over slurry concrete shall not be done less than 4 hours after placing. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Level of Floors: Continuously monitor concrete placing to maintain level floor by use of an instrument level, transit, or laser B. Delivery tickets: Have available copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C94 for each load of concrete delivered to site. Include on the tickets the additional information specified in the ASTM document. C. Continuous Inspection: Construct structural concrete exceeding 2,500 psi compressive strength under continuous inspection of Inspector. Obtain inspection and approval of DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 19 forms and reinforcing by Building Department as required and by the Inspector before placing structural concrete. D. Testing of Concrete: Testing Laboratory shall perform the following tests. Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM C172 and shall be taken from as close to point of placement as possible. 1. Compressive Strength Tests: Cast one set of four or more cylinders from each day's placing and each 150 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, or not less than once for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs and walls, of each strength of structural concrete. Date cylinders, assign record number, and tag showing the location from which sample was taken. Also record slump test result of sample. Do not make more than two series of tests from any one location or batch of concrete. 2. Slump Tests: Make slump test for each set of test cylinders. 3. Test Cylinders: Samples will be made in accordance with ASTM C172. Cast cylinders according to ASTM C31; 24 hours later, store cylinders under moist curing conditions at about 70 degrees F. Test according to ASTM C39; one at 7 and two at 28 day ages. The remaining cylinder(s) shall be kept in reserve in case tests are unsatisfactory. 4. Control Test Cylinders: Cast a set of two or more cylinders for each day's placing of concrete for slabs supported on shoring. Place test cylinders on slabs represented by cylinders and cure the same as slabs. Test cylinders to determine proper times for removal of shores and reshoring. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strengths of 2 cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days. 5. Shrinkage Test: Cast 4" by 4" by 11" long bars with 10" effective gauge length, cured for 7 days in moist room and as specified in ASTM C157. Make measurements at 7-day intervals to 35 day age. Allowable shrinkage shall not exceed 0.045% after period of 35 days. E. Tests for Lightweight Structural Concrete: Conform to CBC Section 1705.3 and ACI 318 Section 26.12.2. Perform following test for each 150 cubic yards of lightweight structural concrete. 1. Along with slump test, ASTM C143, and from same sample, determine air content, unit weight and yield per ASTM C138. 2. Shrinkage Test: Cast 4" by 4" by 11" long bars with 10" effective gauge length, cured for 7 days in moist room and as specified in ASTM C157. Make measurements at 7-day intervals to 35-day age. Allowable shrinkage shall not exceed 0.05% after period of 35 days. 3. Previous Shrinkage Tests: Ready-mix concrete manufacturer may furnish certified test reports from an approved Testing Laboratory as proof of meeting shrinkage requirements provided aggregates used and concrete covered by such test reports conform to the mix design approved for use on the Work. F. Core Tests: comply with ACI 318. If tests show the compressive strength of any concrete falls below the required minimum, additional testing of concrete which unsatisfactory DLX8 - EVSG 10192300127 .00 2025.02.20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 20 tests represent may be required. Make core tests according to ASTM C42. Fill core holes with drypack concrete of strength required for concrete. Contractor shall bear cost of tests for below-strength concrete even if such tests indicate concrete has attained required minimum compressive strength, and all costs for required corrections. G. Field Certifications: For all concrete, provide signed copy of batch plant's certificate stating quantity of each material, amount of water, admixtures, departure time and date accompanying each load of materials or concrete. 3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: The following concrete will be deemed to be defective, and shall be removed promptly from the job site. 1. Concrete, which is not formed as indicated, is not true to intended alignment, is not plumb or level where so intended, is not true to intended grades and levels; 2. Has voids or honeycomb that have been cut, resurfaced, or filled, unless with the approval of the Architect; 3. Has sawdust, shavings, wood, or embedded debris; 4. Does not conform fully to provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Repairs and Replacements: 1. Where defective concrete is found after removal of the forms, cut out the defective concrete, if necessary, and make the surfaces match adjacent surfaces. 2. Work uneven surfaces and angles of concrete to a surface matching adjacent concrete surfaces. 3.16 PROTECTION: 1. Protection: Protect concrete from marring and damage due to weather and construction activities. 1. Protective measures shall include providing temporary coverings, as specified in Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and prohibiting all non-essential construction activities, including cleaning and maintenance of construction equipment. 2. In particular, protect concrete floor slabs from oil, paint and other products which might penetrate and degrade concrete surface END OF SECTION S0.07 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS EQUIPMENT PAD ON GRADE 41"=1'-0" TRANSFORMER ANCHORAGE 5NTS AESTHETIC BOLLARD ON POLE FOOTING 61"=1'-0" FINISHED GRADE 12" 12" #7 @ 12" EACH WAY (T&B) #4 @ 2'-0" OC MAX (2 PER SIDE MIN) EQUIPMENT PER MFR 2" M I N , 9 " M A X U N O VE R I F Y W / C I V I L D W G S 2" CL R 3" MIN 6" MAX 12" TYP UNO 1' - 6 " PER CIVIL DWGS 6" Ø STL PIPE FILLED W/ CONCRETE PER CIVIL/ELECTRICAL DWGS NOTES: 1.BOLLARD IS FOR WARNING PURPOSES ONLY AND NOT DESIGNED TO TAKE ANY IMPACT LOADING. 2.BOLLARD DETAIL FOR BOLLARDS AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 1'-6" 3' - 0 " 3" 48 " M A X PAVEMENT (WHERE OCCURS) - -- - -- SWITCHGEAR ANCHORAGE 11/2"=1'-0" SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE 31"=1'-0" UMC ANCHORAGE 21/2"=1'-0" EDGE DIST PER EQUIPMENT BASE PER MFR 3/4"Ø x 3 1/4" EMBED HILTI 'KB-TZ2' EXP ANCH SS (16 TOTAL) A SECTION EQUIPMENT PER MFR EQUIPMENT BASE PER MFRHARDEN WASHER PER MFR CONC PAD PER - -- 4 - 3/4"Ø x 3 1/4" EMBED HILTI 'KB-TZ2' EXP ANCH SS (4 ANCHORS AT EACH SEGMENT CORNERS) 4 - NOTES: 1.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE NON-DESTRUCTIVE METHODS TO LOCATE REINFORCING LOCATED IN THE PAD PRIOR TO INSTALLING EXPANSION/EPOXY ANCHORS SHOWN. 2.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT CUT/DAMAGE ANY REINFORCING DURING THE INSTALLATION OF THE EXPANSION/EPOXY ANCHOR SHOWN. 3.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND ADJUST PAD REINFORCING PLACEMENT WITH ALL EQUIPMENT LOCATION PRIOR TO PLACING OF CONCRETE. 4.THE SOIL SUPPORTING THE EQUIPMENT PAD SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OUTLINED IN THE GENERAL NOTES. 3" C L R CO V E R 3" CLR COVER EDGE DIST 4 - PER - -- - -- - -- 4 - EQUIPMENT PAD PER 5/8"Ø x 9" EMBED HILTI 'HAS-V-36' ANCHOR ROD + HILTI 'HIT-HY-200-1 V3 EPOXY (8 TOTAL) NOTE: VERIFY ALL WEIGHTS,DIMENSIONS AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER. MAX WEIGHT: 22,400# PLAN VIEW ELEVATION NOTE: VERIFY ALL WEIGHTS,DIMENSIONS AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER. PLAN VIEW ELEVATION NOTE: VERIFY ALL WEIGHTS,DIMENSIONS AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER. 42"36"48"24" MAX WEIGHT: 11,100# SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4 10 8 " 150" HC G = 7 2 " 48 " 94 " ELEVATION MAX WEIGHT 11.575# HC G = 5 7 . 3 " EXPANSION ANCHOR PER 3 - EQUIPMENT PAD PER 4 - A EQUIPMENT PAD PER 4 - PLAN VIEW 12" TYP 12 " TY P EQ EQ EQ EQ 90" 10 5 " 86 " 63 " HC G = 4 2 . 2 " 102" 60 " 77 " 5" TYP 35 " 4" 37 " 102" 8" 7 1/2" TYP 3 15/16" 43 15/16" 7 5/8" 15 1/2" 2 3 / 4 " T Y P EQUIPMENT DETAILS S5.01 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/04/16 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 O: 949.252.1022 F: 949.252.8082 www.kpff.com N I R G T R E TATSS E OFILACFO UC T URA R L R STERED P L OFESSIONA N ER AI E ENGI CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25 Project Manager: ES Reviewed By: Approved By: Project No: Drawn By: SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME PROJECT INFO TEAM Project Name: Project Status: NM CDMV 2300128.04 DLX8 - EVSG PROGRESS PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO U C TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO U C TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS N I R G T RE TATSS E OFILACFO UC TURA R L R STERED P L OF ESSIONA N E R AI E ENGI ................ . . . ............................... . . . ............... No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25CHR I STOPHER A NDREW DOM I NAS 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 ” PROJECT SITE TITLE SHEET C0.01 E N88° 15' 15"W 1925.31' 757.76'336.09'831.45' CAB J J CBCB J CB CABCAB E. DYER ROAD EXISTING MAIN SWITCH BOARD EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK, SEE SHEETS: C1.20 C1.30 C1.40 C1.50 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 COMPOSITE SITE PLAN C0.02 E CAB J J EXISTING MAIN SWITCH BOARD E. DYER ROAD 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 EROSION CONTROL AND DEMOLITION PLAN C1.20 E CAB J J EXISTING MAIN SWITCH BOARD E. DYER ROAD 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 GRADING PLAN C1.30 E CAB J J EXISTING MAIN SWITCH BOARD E. DYER ROAD 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 PAVING PLAN C1.40 E CAB J J EXISTING MAIN SWITCH BOARD E. DYER ROAD 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 UTILITY PLAN C1.50 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 DETAILS C5.00 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS C6.00 SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass to remain. 2.Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass. 3.Clearing and grubbing. 4.Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5.Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6.Disconnecting and capping or sealing site utilities. 7.Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B.Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C.Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D.Do not commence site-clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B.Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C.Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to sediment and erosion control Drawings or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B.Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C.Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A.Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. B.Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C.Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 3.4 UTILITIES A.Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1.Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. B.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. B.Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B.Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. C.Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 3.8 DISPOSAL A.Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B.Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 31 10 00 SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Preparing subgrades for pavements and exterior plants. 2.Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3.Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4.Base course for concrete walks pavements. 5.Base course for asphalt paving. 6.Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Standard Specifications: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC), latest edition and supplements for rock materials. The Standard Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the Work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurement and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1.3 REFERENCES 1.4 DEFINITIONS A.Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 1.Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2.Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B.Base Course: Course placed between the subgrade and hot-mix asphalt or concrete paving. C.Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D.Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E.Classified Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials not defined as rock F.Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. G.Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1.Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions changes in the Work. 2.Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. H.Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. I.Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J.Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K.Unclassified Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials encountered regardless of nature of materials, including rock. L.Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A.General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B.Satisfactory Soils: Sand, gravel, friable earth, or non-expansive clays, subject to Testing Laboratory's approval. Fill and backfill material shall be free of organic material, slag, cinders, expansive soils, trash or rubble and stones having maximum dimension greater than [6 inches]. C.Unsatisfactory Soils: Expansive and other soils as defined in the project's geotechnical investigation report. 1.Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D.Base Course: Material conforming to SSPWC section 200-2.2, Crushed Aggregate Base or SSPWC section 200-2.4 Crushed Miscellaneous Base. E.Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F.Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded clean, crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G.Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A.Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. Color coding shall be according to the American Public Works Association (APWA) standards: 1.Blue - Potable water and fire suppression lines. 2.Green - Sanitary sewer and storm drain lines 3.Orange - Communication, alarm or signal lines 4.Purple - Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines 5.Red - Electrical power lines, cables, conduit and lighting lines 6.Yellow - Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous material lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B.Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" or “Demolition”. C.Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" or “Demolition,” during earthwork operations. 3.2 EXCAVATION A.Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1.If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A.Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A.Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B.Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide 6 inch clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. C.Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1.Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. 3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A.Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. B.Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1.Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A.Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A.Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B.Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C.Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete. D.Provide blanket protection for all utility pipes and conduits under driveways, roadways, parking lots, and other vehicular path of travel per APWA Standard Plan 225-1 where the minimum cover over the pipes and conduits is less than 36”. E.Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1.Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F.Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. G.Install warning tape directly above utilities, minimum 6 inches above top of pipe, minimum 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.10 SOIL FILL A.Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B.Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1.Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2.Under walks and pavements, use engineered fill. 3.Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4.Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5.Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A.Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1.Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2.Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A.Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B.Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C.Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1.Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 95 percent. 2.Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 90 percent. 3.Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 85 percent. 4.For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material to 85 percent. 3.13 GRADING A.General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. B.Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1.Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2.Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3.Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C.Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.14 BASE COURSES A.Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B.On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1.Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2.Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE A.Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B.On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1.Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 2.Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B.Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C.Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D.Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. E.When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.17 PROTECTION A.Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B.Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. C.Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 31 20 00 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF DLX8 515 E Dyer Rd., Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner AK2300128 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue:No:Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 PERMIT SET 2025/04/17 CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS C6.01 SECTION 32 12 16 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section includes hot-mix asphalt paving. B.Traffic Stripes and Pavement Marking. 1.traffic stripe: A longitudinal centerline or a longitudinal lane line used for separating traffic lanes in the same direction of travel or in the opposing direction of travel or a longitudinal edge line marking the edge of the traveled way or the edge of a lane at a gore area separating traffic at an exit or entrance ramp. A traffic stripe is a traffic line as shown. 2.Pavement marking: A transverse marking such as (1) a limit line, (2) a stop line; or (3) a word, symbol, shoulder, parking stall, or railroad grade crossing marking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B.Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. C.Material certificates. D.Log of placement of asphalt, including dates, times, temperature readings and other pertinent information. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located. B.Standard Specifications: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) and the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans), latest editions and supplements for asphalt paving work. These Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the Work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurement and payment sections do not apply to this document. C.Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the atmospheric temperature is at least 50 deg F and rising at time of placement or during unsuitable weather. B.Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at an ambient or surface temperature range recommended by the paint manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A.Coarse Aggregate (Type III Asphalt Concrete Mixture): Conforming to SSPWC 203-6.2.3. B.Fine Aggregate (Type III Asphalt Concrete Mixture): Conforming to SSPWC 203-6.2.3. C.Mineral Filler: Conforming to SSPWC 203-6.2.4. 2.2 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIXTURE A.Composition and Grading: Conforming to SSPWC Sections 203-1 and 203-6.5. 2.3 ASPHALT MATERIALS A.Asphalt Binder: Paving asphalt, conforming to SSPWC 203-1.2 and asphalt concrete curb shall be PG 70-10 according to SSPWC 203-6.2.1. B.Tack Coat: PG 64-10 conforming to SSPWC 302-5.2.3. C.Mixes: Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA): Wearing Course: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mix III-C3, PG 64-10 designed in conformance with SSPWC Section 203. Base Course: Dense, hot laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mix III-B2, PG 64-10 designed in conformance with SSPWC Section 203. D.Fog Seal: CSS-1 conforming to SSPWC 203-3. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. B.Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with Caltrans Standard Specifications - Section 84 (Federal Specification No. TT-P-1952E for Blue, Red and Green paint; and State of California Standard Specification No. PTWB-01R2 for White, Yellow and Black paint) with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 1.Color: White, Yellow, and Blue as indicated on the plans. C.Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete. 1.Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 24-inch minimum length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE AND ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A.All work shall be in conformance with SSPWC Sections 203-6 and 302-5. 3.2 COLD MILLING A.Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1.Mill to a depth of 2 inches. 3.3 PATCHING A.Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B.Tack Coat: Tack coat shall be uniformly applied by a distributor truck at a minimum rate of SS-1h emulsified asphalt in conformance to SSWC Table 302-5.8(A) or the application rate to achieve the minimum residual rate in conformance to SSWC Table 302-5.8(B), whichever is greater. For PG 64-10 paving asphalt, the application rate shall be a minimum of the residual rate in conformance to SSWC Table 302-5.8(B). C.Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A.Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. B.Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1.Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. C.Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials. D.Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 gallon per square yard. 1.Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2.Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.Asphalt binder tack coat temperature must be in the range of 285 to 350 deg F when applied. 3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A.Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1.Spread mix at minimum temperature of 285 deg F and maximum temperature of 350 deg F. 2.Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B.Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. C.Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.6 FOG SEAL A.Apply asphaltic emulsion for fog seal coat at a residual asphalt rate of 0.2 to 0.06 gal/sq yd. B.Apply fog seal coat when the ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. C.At the time of application, the temperature of asphaltic emulsion must be from 130 to 180 degrees F. D.Apply asphaltic emulsion when the ambient air temperature is from 65 to 110 degrees F and pavement surface is at least 80 degrees F. E.Do not apply asphaltic emulsion when weather forecasts predict the ambient air temperature will fall below 39 degrees F within 24 hours after application. F.When tested under California Test 339, the application rate for asphaltic emulsion must not vary from the average by more than: a.15 percent in the traverse direction b.10 percent in longitudinal direction 3.7 COMPACTION A.General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1.Pave HMA in maximum 3” thick compacted layers. 2.Minimum atmospheric temperature shall be 55 deg F, and minimum surface temperature shall be 60 deg F. If the surface to be paved is both in sunlight and shade, pavement surface temperatures must be taken in the shade. 3.Complete compaction for Base Course before surface temperature drops below 250 deg F, and for Wearing Course before surface temperature drops below 150 deg F. B.Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C.Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1.Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D.Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E.Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. F.Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A.Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1.Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2.Wearing Course: Plus 1/4 inch (no minus). 3.Total Base Course plus Wearing Course shall not be less than specified thickness. B.Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1.Base Course: 1/4 inch 2.Wearing Course: 1/8 inch 3.Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.9 PAVEMENT STRIPING AND MARKING A.Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B.Allow paving to age before starting pavement striping and marking, as recommended by the paint manufacturer. C.Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust in addition to recommended surface preparation by the paint manufacturer. D.Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. E.Do not paint if the atmospheric temperature could drop below 50 deg F during the drying period. 3.10 WHEEL STOPS A.Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel 1 inch beneath top of wheel stop. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C.Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 3.12 DISPOSAL A.Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. END OF SECTION 32 12 16 AMPERES ABOVE AIR CONDITIONING ABOVE COUNTER TOP ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ALUMINUM ARCHITECT ABOVE SPLASH BLOCK ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE AUTOMATIC AUXILIARY AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE BELOW FINISH FLOOR BUILDING BELOW FINISHED GRADE CONDUIT CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CIRCUIT CEILING COLUMN COMBINATION CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION DOWN FROM CEILING DIAMETER DOWN DRAWING EACH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXHAUST FAN ELECTRIC / ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EMERGENCY POWER OFF EQUIPMENT ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXISTING EXTERIOR FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FLOOR/FLOORING FIXTURE GROUND GENERAL CONTRACTOR GENERAL DUTY GENERATOR GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT HEAVY DUTY HORSEPOWER HEIGHT HEATING/VENTILATING/AIR CONDITIONING HOT WATER INSIDE DIAMETER ISOLATED GROUND INTERMEDIATE METAL JUNCTION BOX KILOVOLT-AMPERES KILOWATTS A ABV A/C ACT AFF AFG AL ARCH ASB ASC ASD AUTO AUX ATS AWG BFF BLDG BFG C C/B CCTV CCT CLG COL COMB CONC CONST DFC DIA DN DWG EA EC EF ELEC EMER EMT EPO EQUIP EWC EX EXT FA FACP FLR FXTR G GC GD GEN GFI HD HP HT HVAC HW ID IG IMT J KVA KW LTG M MC MCB MCC MCM MDP MECH MH MIN MISC MLO MSB MTD NEC NEMA NEUT NF NIC NL N.O. N.C. NO. NTS LIGHTING METER MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MOTOR CONTROL CENTER THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MECHANICAL MANHOLE MINIMUM MISCELLANEOUS MAIN LUG ONLY MAIN SWITCHBOARD MOUNTED NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEUTRAL NON FUSED NOT IN CONTRACT NIGHT LIGHT NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED NUMBER NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILSKCMIL AMP FUSEDAF OD OFCI OH OUTSIDE DIAMETER OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OVERHEAD UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES PVC RECPT RE: REQD RGS RM SCH SPEC SVC TEL TS TYP TTB UG UL UNO XFMR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RECEPTACLE REFERENCE/REFER TO REQUIRED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL ROOM SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE TELEPHONE TRANSFER SWITCH TYPICAL TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD UNDERGROUND UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE TRANSFORMER TR TAMPER RESISTANT W W/ W/O WP WATTS WITH WITHOUT WEATHER PROOF WR WEATHER RESISTANT UP UNDERGROUND PRIMARY V VA VOLTS VOLT - AMPERES US UNDERGROUND SECONDARY PNL PANEL POC POINT OF CONNECTION PF PH PL POWER FACTOR PHASE PROPERTY LINE PM PRIMARY METER PME PAD-MOUNTED ENCLOSURE REMARKS POWER DISTRIBUTION SYMBOL SCHEDULE ALL SYMBOLS DO NOT NECESSARILY APPEAR ON THESE DRAW INGS DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL HOMERUN - TO CIRCUIT NO. 1,3,5 ON PANEL 'A' BRANCH CIRCUIT OR CONDUIT UNDER FLOOR BRANCH CIRCUIT OR CONDUIT EXPOSED AND/OR SURFACE MOUNTED A-1,3,5 FEEDER TAG. RE: ELECTRICAL FEEDER SCHEDULE FOR CONDUIT AND WIRE SIZE.B100 JUNCTION BOX FUSE DISCONNECT SWITCH ABOVE GROUND JUNCTION BOX SWITCHBOARD / DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD, REFER TO SWITCHBOARD SCHEDULE OR RISER DIAGRAM J MOTOR SPD SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE. EXISTING TO REMAIN BRANCH CIRCUIT OR CONDUIT UNDER FLOOR ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS WITH AN OVERALL LENGTH IN EXCESS OF 75 FEET SHALL BE INCREASED IN WIRE SIZE TO ACCOMMODATE VOLTAGE DROP, INCLUDING EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS TO OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. ALL JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE FOR FUTURE SERVICE PER CEC. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO FACILITATE NEW CONSTRUCTION AND INCLUDE ALL SUCH WORK IN HIS BID. NO ADDITIONAL FUNDS WILL BE AUTHORIZED FOR ANY EXTRA WORK OR MATERIAL NECESSARY DUE TO THE FAILURE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS OR FOR LACK OF COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES. PVC CONDUIT SHALL ONLY BE USED UNDERGROUND WITH PLASTIC COATED OR WRAPPED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT ELBOWS. DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND MAY NOT BE DRAWN EXACTLY TO SCALE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING EXACT ROUTING OF ALL SERVICES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ALL OTHER TRADES TO AVOID SPACING OR ROUTING PROBLEMS. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL INCLUDE A GREEN GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CEC 250.122, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ACCURATE PANEL SCHEDULES. SCHEDULES SHALL INDICATE DEVICES AND/OR EQUIPMENT SERVED, LOCATION AND/OR ROOM NUMBERS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH 2022 EDITION OF THE CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE AND LOCAL CODES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO MINIMIZE CONFLICTS. ALL WIRE AND CABLE SIZES ARE FOR COPPER, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AS ALUMINUM. NO CONDUCTOR SHALL BE LOADED BEYOND ITS ALLOWABLE AMPACITY. CONFIRM WITH LOCAL CODES, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND EQUIPMENT VENDORS ON THE LOCATION AND MOUNTING METHOD FOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES, MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS, COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECTS, ETC. PRIOR TO ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN AND INSTALLATION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DOUBLE CHECK ALL FEEDER CONDUCTOR AND CONDUIT SIZES WITH CEC AND LOCAL CODES PRIOR TO BID, ORDERING OR CUTTING CONDUCTORS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS FOR CIRCUITS LESS THAN 600V SHALL BE COPPER (XHHW OR EQUAL) SIZED AS FOLLOWS: GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES 12. 13. 11. 9 10. 8. 6. 7. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 14. BREAKER RATING WIRE SIZE BREAKER RATING WIRE SIZE 15 AMP 20 AMP 30 AMP 40 AMP 50 AMP 60 AMP 70 AMP 80 AMP 90 AMP 100 AMP #12 AWG #12 AWG #10 AWG #8 AWG #6 AWG #4 AWG #4 AWG #3 AWG #2 AWG #1 AWG WHERE TIGHTENING TORQUE IS INDICATED AS A NUMERIC VALUE OR IN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER, A CALIBRATED TORQUE TOOL SHALL BE USED TO ACHIEVE THE INDICATED VALUE, UNLESS THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER HAS PROVIDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR AN ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF ACHIEVING THE REQUIRED TORQUE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A LETTER TO THE ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR STATING THAT ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TORQUED ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 15. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND RECEIVE APPROVAL FROM THE ORANGE COUNTY FIRE AUTHORITY (OCFA) FOR GENERATOR FUEL STORAGE AND REFUELING PRIOR TO ORDERING. 16. 1 1 CONDUCTOR SPLICING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED, NO EXCEPTIONS.17. SITE UTILITY SYMBOLS SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION REMARKSSYMBOL PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER EXISTING UTILITY COMPANY PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER UTILITY COMPANY PAD MOUNT SWITCHGEAR EXISTING UTILITY COMPANY PAD MOUNT SWITCHGEAR UTILITY COMPANY OVERHEAD LINE POLE EXISTING UTILITY COMPANY OVERHEAD LINE POLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MANHOLE EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITY MANHOLE UNDERGROUND PRIMARY DUCTBANK.UP UNDERGROUND SECONDARY DUCTBANK.US UNDERGROUND COMMUNICATIONS DUCTBANK.UC EXISTING UNDERGROUND PRIMARY DUCTBANK.EUP EXISTING UNDERGROUND SECONDARY DUCTBANK.EUS EXISTING UNDERGROUND COMMUNICATIONS DUCTBANK.EUC REMOVE UNDERGROUND PRIMARY DUCTBANK.DUP REMOVE UNDERGROUND SECONDARY DUCTBANK.DUS REMOVE UNDERGROUND COMMUNICATIONS DUCTBANK.DUC ALL SYMBOLS DO NOT NECESSARILY APPEAR ON THESE DRAWINGS THE GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE PERFORMANCE TESTED WHEN INSTALLED ON SITE. TEST SHALL BE CONDUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. A WRITTEN RECORD OF TEST SHALL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO ENGINEER, OWNER AND AHJ. GROUND FAULT PROTECTION PROJECTS EV CHARGERS - NOT IN SCOPE OF WORK FULL DESIGN EVSG (SWITCHGEAR ONLY) - CURRENT SCOPE OF WORK EV CHARGER DATA L2 CHARGERS 00 119 2119 119 119 2 L2 STALLS L3 CHARGERS 0 0 4 4 L3 STALLS 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 9/ 1 9 / 2 0 2 5 2 : 0 8 : 0 0 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . r vt EV0.01 SYMBOLS, LEGENDS, AND ABBREVIATIONS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. ELECTRICAL SHEET SCHEDULE EV0.01 SYMBOLS, LEGENDS, AND ABBREVIATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV1.00 SITE PLAN - DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL EV2.00 SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL EV6.00 DIAGRAMS & DETAILS - ELECTRICAL EV6.01 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL EV7.00 SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL EV9.00 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.01 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.02 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL EV9.03 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/11 Issue for Permit 2025/04/21 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 2025/09/19 1 9-24-2025 E E J CBCB CB CABCAB E E E E J J CBCB J CB CABCAB DEMOLITION KEYNOTES: 1. EXISTING UNDERGROUND PRIMARY. CONDUCTORS TO BE REMOVED BY UTILITY AND CONDUIT TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY AND DEMOLISH ANY CONDUIT WITHIN THE BOUNDS OF NEW EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED. ABANDONED CONDUIT SHALL BE CAPPED BY CONTRACTOR. 2. EXISTING UTILITY PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER AND ASSOCIATED CONDUCTORS TO BE REMOVED BY UTILITY. EXISTING PAD TO BE REWORKED BY CONTRACTOR FOR REPLACEMENT TRANSFORMER. 3. APPROXIMATE ROUTING OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND SECONDARY CONDUCTORS, TO BE REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR. AREA TO BE REWORKED FOR NEW SECONDARY. 4. EXISTING CURRENT TRANSFORMER METER TO BE REMOVED. COORDINATE REMOVAL WITH UTILITY. 5. PROVIDE A TAP ALONG THE EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD BUS FOR A TEMPORARY 400-AMPERE CONNECTION. 6. PROVIDE A TAP ALONG THE EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD BUS FOR A TEMPORARY 600-AMPERE CONNECTION. 7. PROVIDE FEEDER FOR TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTION. REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET EV6.01 FOR SIZING AND QUANTITIES. PROVIDE PROTECTION AND SUPPORT AS REQUIRED BY CEC 590.4. 8. PROVIDE 480-VOLT, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 320-KILOWATT, PORTABLE GENERATOR FOR TEMPORARY POWER. PROVIDE WITH 400-AMPERE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. PROPOSED LOCATION, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER. 9. PROVIDE 480-VOLT, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 500-KILOWATT, PORTABLE GENERATOR FOR TEMPORARY POWER. PROVIDE WITH 600-AMPERE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. PROPOSED LOCATION, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER. 10. SEE SHEET C1.20 FOR ASSOCIATED WALL DEMOLITION. 11. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND SECONDARY FEEDER INTERCEPTION. REMOVE EXISTING CONDUCTORS FROM TRANSFORMER TO ASSOCIATED SWITCHBOARD "MMA". 12. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE EXCESS CONCRETE FROM EXISTING PULL SECTION. REPAIR ENCLOSURE AS REQUIRED. 13. PROPOSED LOCATION OF THE REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD. 14. ALL TEMPORARY GENERATORS MUST BE PROVIDED WITH: • A READILY-ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT FOR THE TEMPORARY CONDUCTORS FEEDING THE BUILDING PER CEC 590.4(E) & 702.12(A). • OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AT THE GENERATOR FOR ALL TEMPORARY UNGROUNDED SERVICE CONDUCTORS FEEDING THE BUILDING. NO OVERCURRENT DEVICE SHALL BE INSERTED IN A GROUNDED SERVICE CONDUCTOR EXCEPT A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT SIMULTANEOUSLY OPENS ALL CONDUCTORS OF THE CIRCUIT PER CEC 230.90. • PROVISIONS TO SHUT DOWN THE PRIME MOVER PER CEC 445.18(B). • A REMOTE EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH TO SHUT DOWN THE PRIME MOVER PER CEC 445.18(C). • A GROUNDED SYSTEM PER CEC 250.30(A). REFER TO THE GENERATOR GROUNDING DETAIL ON SHEET EV6.00 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. # DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES: 1. THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF ITEMS TO BE REMOVED. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE BECAUSE OF THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR’S UNFAMILIARITY WITH THESE DETAILS. 2. ALL SALVAGE WILL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER AND SHALL BE DELIVERED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO A LOCATION AS DIRECTED. ANY SALVAGE NOT DESIRED BY THE OWNER SHALL BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE PREMISES. 3. ALL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION SHALL HAVE THEIR CIRCUITRY REMOVED BACK TO THE ASSOCIATED PROTECTIVE DEVICE. THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHALL REMAIN AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE PANELBOARD AND BE INDICATED ON THE PANEL DIRECTORY AS A SPARE OR REUSED FOR NEW CIRCUITRY. ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY IS DEFINED AS ALL WIRE, CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, WIRING DEVICES, COVER PLATES, ETC. ASSOCIATED WITH THE ITEM SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL. CONDUIT FOR ITEMS SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL AND IN INACCESSIBLE AREAS SHALL BE EMPTIED AND SEALED OR OTHERWISE TERMINATED IN A SAFE MANNER ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER. 4. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS WITH A PORTION OF THE LOAD REMOVED SHALL HAVE THE REMOVED LOADS AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY TERMINATED IN SUCH A MANNER THAT ANY REMAINING LOAD REMAINS ACTIVE AND IN FIRST-CLASS OPERATING CONDITION. 5. HOLES AND DAMAGED AREAS CAUSED BY REMOVAL OF ANY OF THE ABOVE ITEMS AND WHICH ARE NOT CONCEALED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REPAIRED TO MATCH EXISTING SURFACES. IN ADDITION, OPENINGS CREATED BY THE REMOVAL OF THESE ITEMS THROUGH FIRE RESISTANT RATED WALLS SHALL BE FIRE STOPPED. 6. WHERE CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS ARE INDICATED TO BE REMOVED, CONDUIT SHALL BE REMOVED TO POINT OF CONCEALMENT AND WIRING REMOVED ENTIRELY. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATES WHERE REQUIRED. 7. BLANK COVERPLATES AND ALL UNUSED OPENINGS IN BOXES, RACEWAYS, AUXILIARY GUTTERS, CABINETS, EQUIPMENT CASES AND HOUSINGS SHALL BE CLOSED TO AFFORD PROTECTION SUBSTANTIALLY EQUIVALENT TO THE WALLS OF THE EQUIPMENT. 8. IF A CONDUIT RUN IS EXPOSED OR A SURFACE RACEWAY LEFT WITHOUT A MOUNTING SURFACE DUE TO THE REMOVAL OF A PARTITION, THE CONDUIT SHALL BE REROUTED AS ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER. 9. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES THAT ARE TO BE RELOCATED BUT WERE DAMAGED WHEN REMOVED SHALL BE REPAIRED, RESTORED OR NEW ONES PURCHASED TO THE APPROVAL OF THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER/ENGINEER OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES WHICH ARE INDICATED AS RELOCATED BUT ARE FOUND TO BE UNUSABLE. 1 EXISTING WAREHOUSE BUILDING EAST DYER ROAD HA L L A D A Y S T R E E T EV1.00 2 EXISTING PARKING BUILDING 1 EU S 2 3 4 7 DUS 3 EXISTING UTILITY (SCE) P.O.C. EAST DYER ROAD DUS 4 DUS DU S DUS EXISTING PARKING BUILDING EXISTING EXTERIOR "MSB" PULL SECTION 8 9 EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MMA" EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MSB"6 5 ELECTRICAL ROOM -S008 EXISTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD "DB" 10 EU S 11 12 14 14 1 1 13 1 12 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 NORTH Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 9/ 1 9 / 2 0 2 5 2 : 0 9 : 4 1 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . r vt EV1.00 SITE PLAN - DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. 0 60' 120'30'15' 0 20' 40'10' 1" =60'-0" 1" =20'-0" 1" = 60'-0"EV1.00 1 SITE PLAN - DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL 1" = 20'-0"EV1.00 2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN - DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL M M NOT TO SCALEEV1.00 3 EXISTING EXTERIOR "MSB" PULL SECTION Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/11 Issue for Permit 2025/04/21 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 2025/09/19 9-24-2025 J CBCB CB CABCAB E E E 6071150 N 2205450 E J J CBCB J CB CABCAB E E E E 6071150 KEYNOTES: 1. PROVIDE ONE 5" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FOR PRIMARY CABLES (CABLES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY UTILITY). MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH SHALL BE 48" BELOW FINISHED GRADE. CONDUIT SHALL BE CAPPED BY CONTRACTOR. 2. PROPOSED ROUTING OF NEW UNDERGROUND CONDUCTORS. REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET EV6.01 FOR SIZING AND QUANTITIES. 3. PROVIDE ROUGH-IN PROVISIONS FROM MAIN SWITCHGEAR. ONE (1) SIX-INCH CONDUIT FROM EACH SPARE SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. 4. LOCATION OF NEW CONDUIT STUB. CONTRACTOR TO STUB OUT 5' HORIZONTALLY FROM EDGE OF NEW EQUIPMENT. 5. PROVIDE ROUGH-IN PROVISIONS FROM MAIN SWITCHGEAR. PROVIDE ONE (1) SIX-INCH CONDUIT, WITH PULL STRING, FROM SPARE SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF CONDUIT STUB SHOWN. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM FINAL LOCATION WITH THE OWNER DURING CONSTRUCTION. 6. BOLLARDS WITHIN EQUIPMENT WORKING SPACE TO BE REMOVABLE TYPE. 7. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND SECONDARY FEEDER INTERCEPTION. EXTEND EXISTING CONDUIT FROM INTERCEPTION POINT TO REPLACEMENT TRANSFORMER LOCATION. PROVIDE NEW CONDUCTORS, DO NOT SPLICE. UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUITS AS APPLICABLE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY CONDUIT QUANTITIES AND SIZES. SEE ONE-LINE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. # GENERAL NOTES: 1. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR COORDINATE EXACT EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR WORK. 1 EXISTING WAREHOUSE BUILDING EAST DYER ROAD HA L L A D A Y S T R E E T EV2.00 2 EXISTING PARKING BUILDING 'DLX8-MVSG-1' EAST DYER ROAD 4 'DLX8-XFMR-BLDG' EXISTING PARKING BUILDING 1 ELECTRICAL ROOM -S008 EXISTING EXTERIOR "MSB" PULL SECTION 2 3 2 EXISTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD "DB" EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MMA" EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MSB" 6(TYPICAL) 2 US US US UP UTILITY (SCE) PAD MOUNTED EQUIPMENT (P.O.C.) (10'X14' PAD) UNDER SEPERATE PERMIT AND NOT UNDER SCOPE OF WORK. UPUP 'DLX8-MV-UMC' EU S EU S US 7 5 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 NORTH Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 9/ 1 9 / 2 0 2 5 2 : 0 8 : 0 2 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . r vt EV2.00 SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1" = 60'-0"EV2.00 1 SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. 0 60' 120'30'15' 1" = 20'-0"EV2.00 2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL 0 20' 40'10' 1" =60'-0" 1" =20'-0" Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/11 Issue for Permit 2025/04/21 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 2025/09/19 9-24-2025 OPEN TOP VIEW SECTIONAL VIEW LOAD SWITCH FROM UTILITY FROM UTILITY CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER KEY NOTES: 1. 600A DEAD-BREAK T-BODY. REFER TO ONE-LINE FOR VOLTAGE RATING AND CONDUCTOR SIZE. 2. VISTA SWITCH GROUND BAR. 3. ALUMINUM CONNECTING STUD. 4. LOAD BREAK REDUCING TAP PLUG. 5. CONTRACTOR TO USE BURNDY COMPRESSION C-TAP CATALOG PART NUMBER YCHC29TC2 OR APPROVED EQUAL TO TIE TERMINATION SHIELD, #14 MINIMUM BARE CONDUCTOR THROUGH GROUNDING TAB, AND #6 MINIMUM GROUND CONDUCTOR TO LAND ON GROUND BAR. 6. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SHIELDED CABLE FROM WAY 1, PHASE-A ONLY TO CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER. REFER TO ONE-LINE FOR VOLTAGE RATING. #2 MINIMUM CABLE SIZE. 7. 200A FUSED LOAD BREAK ELBOW. REFER TO ONE-LINE FOR VOLTAGE RATING. 8. 200A LOAD BREAK TERMINATION. REFER TO ONE-LINE FOR VOLTAGE RATING. 9. 200A LOAD BREAK BUSHING INSERT. 10. MANUFACTURER PROVIDED CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY TRANSFORMER PRIMARY VOLTAGE AND CONFIRM WITH CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 10 9 8 2 5 6 4 137 6 7 1 2 # MAIN SWITCHGEAR 'MVSG-1' #1 CU. GROUND BUS IN MAIN SWITCHGEAR GRADE 5 #1/0 CU. #6 CU. UTILITY PRIMARY METERING CABINET COORDINATE CONNECTION WITH UTILITY BUILDING TRANSFORMER 2 2 KEYNOTES: 1. CONTINUATION TO UTILITY. SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF 12,000 VOLTS. PROVIDE ONE 5" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING FOR PRIMARY CABLES (CABLES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY UTILITY). MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH SHALL BE 48" BELOW FINISHED GRADE. COORDINATE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS WITH SERVING UTILITY, SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON (SCE). 2. REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET EV6.01 FOR SIZING AND QUANTITIES. 3. REFER TO DETAIL 2 OF THIS SHEET FOR GROUNDING DIAGRAM. 4. PROVIDE NEW EMPTY 6" CONDUIT STUBBED AT LOCATION INDICATED ON SHEET EV2.00. 5. REFER TO DETAIL 3 OF THIS SHEET FOR SWITCHGEAR GROUNDING DETAIL. # 1 MINIMUM 20'-0" OF BARE COPPER GROUNDING CONDUCTOR BURIED 30" BELOW GRADE. SIZE TO MATCH GROUNDING ELECTRODE. SWITCHGEAR PAD GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 250.66. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL NOT BE SMALLER THAN #6 AWG COPPER OR #4 AWG ALUMINUM. GROUND WIRE SHALL BE EXOTHERMICALLY WELDED TO GROUND ROD (TYPICAL) 3/4" DIAMETER X 10' LONG COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD. INSTALL TOP OF GROUND ROD MINIMUM 24" BELOW FINISHED GRADE. GROUND RODS SHALL BE SPACED MINIMUM 10'-0" FROM EACH OTHER. (TYPICAL) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ALL NON-CURRENT-CARRYING METAL PARTS SHALL BE GROUNDED PER NEC 250.190 WITH GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 250.66. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL NOT BE SMALLER THAN #6 AWG COPPER OR #4 AWG ALUMINUM. SWITCHGEAR GROUND BAR MAIN, 6-WAY SWITCHGEAR 'DLX8-MVSG-1' MAIN WAY2 WAY3 WAY4 WAY5 WAY6 GRADE 1 2 3 42 PRIMARY METERING CABINET M 12.0KV-480Y/277V TRANSFORMER 'DLX8-XFMR-BLDG' TO EXISTING BUILDING 2000A SWITCHBOARD LOAD-BREAK SWITCH 2 TO EXISTING BUILDING 1200A SWITCHBOARD2 FINISHED GRADE TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS BACKFILL WITH SUITABLE MATERIAL COMPACTED TO 95% MAXIMUM DENSITY (ASTM D 1557) CABLE WARNING TAPE (RED) SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION PER CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLEAN FILL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED CONDUIT(S) AND CONDUIT SPACERS. (SEE ONE-LINE FOR EXACT SIZE AND QUANTITIES) SAND BACKFILL 30" MIN.NOTES: 1. THE CLEAN FILL SHALL PASS THROUGH A 3/8" MESH SCREEN AND SHALL NOT CONTAIN SHARP STONES. OTHER BACKFILL SHALL NOT CONTAIN ASHES, CINDERS, SHELLS, FROZEN MATERIAL, LOOSE DEBRIS OR STONES LARGER THAN 2" IN MAXIMUM DIMENSION. 2. WHERE EXISTING UTILITIES ARE LIKELY TO BE ENCOUNTERED, CONTRACTOR SHALL HAND DIG AND PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES. 3. PROVIDE SEPARATION OF CONDUITS OF DIFFERENT SYSTEMS (I.E., ELECTRIC, CATV & TELEPHONE) PER UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE ROUTING OF CONDUITS WITH OTHER TRADES TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED SEPARATION WITH GAS, WATER, ETC., SERVICES. 4. TRENCH SHALL MEET CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 5. PROVIDE CONDUIT SPACERS 5' O.C. ALL ELBOWS SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED. 11 " MI N . 12 " MI N . TY P I C A L C O V E R 48 " F O R P R I M A R Y A N D 36 " F O R S E C O N D A R Y C O N D U I T S 12" LEVEL 3/4" CRUSHED STONE VAULT 3 3'-0" 3'-0"FINISHED GRADE 3 12" LEVEL 3/4" CRUSHED STONE 5 4 PAD FRONT 1 5 2 2-#4/0 AWG CU. TAILS TO EXTEND 48" MIN. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE 15" A A 15" MAX 24" MAX 10" MAX GROUND GRID TAILS FINISHED GRADE PAD SECTION A-A 54" REQUIREMENTS: PRIMARY ZONE A.THE PRIMARY ZONE IS RESTRICTED TO THE AREA SHOWN ABOVE. REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUIT QUANTITY AND SIZE. B.THE CONDUIT SHALL ENTER THE VAULT HORIZONTALLY & SHALL BE NON-METALLIC. C. THE CONDUITS SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 1" TO A MAXIMUM OF 3" WITHIN THE VAULT & SHALL HAVE BELL MOUTH FITTING. D. EACH CONDUIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A GROUNDING TYPE CHAFE BUSHING & SHALL BE PLUGGED UNTIL THE PRIMARY CABLES ARE INSTALLED. SECONDARY ZONE E.THE SECONDARY ZONE IS RESTRICTED TO THE AREA SHOWN ABOVE. REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUIT QUANTITY AND SIZE. F. THE CONDUIT SHALL ENTER THE VAULT HORIZONTALLY & SHALL BE NON-METALLIC. G. THE CONDUITS SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 1" TO MAXIMUM OF 3" WITHIN THE VAULT; NON-METALLIC CONDUITS SHALL HAVE THREADED ENDS. H. NON-METALLIC CONDUITS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH GROUNDING TYPE CHAFE BUSHINGS & EACH CONDUIT SHALL BE PLUGGED UNTIL THE SECONDARY CABLES ARE INSTALLED SECONDARY ZONE (SEE REQUIREMENTS BELOW) PRIMARY ZONE (SEE REQUIREMENTS BELOW) 6" MAXIMUM 4" MINIMUM LIST OF MATERIALS ITEM 5 DESCRIPTION PRECAST FOUNDATION (SEE CIVIL PLANS FOR DIMENSIONS) ROD GROUND GALVANIZED STEEL 5/8" x 8' WIRE #4/0, 19 STRAND BARE COPPER CONNECTOR "COPPER BUGS" #4/0 SOLID & STRANDED 4 2 1 CONNECTOR GROUND #4/0 WIRE -5/8" GALV. ROD3 REFER TO CIVIL PLANS FOR EXACT DIMENSIONS 1 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 9/ 1 9 / 2 0 2 5 2 : 0 8 : 0 2 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . r vt EV6.00 DIAGRAMS & DETAILS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 2 SITE GROUNDING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 3 PAD MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR & METERING CABINET GROUNDING PLAN NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 6 TYPICAL DUCT BANK DETAIL NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 5 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER CONNECTION DETAIL NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 7 TYPICAL PADMOUNT TRANSFORMER PAD & VAULT DETAIL Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/11 Issue for Permit 2025/04/21 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 2025/09/19 NOT TO SCALEEV6.00 4 GENERATOR GROUNDING DETAIL 1 PROVIDE GROUND RODS WITHIN MOIST SOIL IF POSSIBLE REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUCTOR SIZES. 9-24-2025 Distribution Panel "DP" LB_1 Rating 100.0 A CBL LB1 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft Switchboard "MSB" CBL DP 3 Set(s) of: #600 kcmil Conductors, #4/0 Ground Wire In 3" Conduit Length: 20.0 ft PD-H Rating 200.0 A PD-A Rating 400.0 A PD-B Rating 200.0 A PD-C Rating 200.0 A PD-E Rating 200.0 A PD-F Rating 200.0 A PD-G Rating 200.0 A PD-J Rating 200.0 A PD-K Rating 200.0 A PD-L Rating 200.0 A PD-M Rating 200.0 A PD-DP Rating 1000.0 A MSB-MPD Rating 2000.0 A PD-N Rating 100.0 A PD-Q Rating 100.0 A PD-R Rating 100.0 A PD-T Rating 100.0 A PD-EV Rating 175.0 A MMA-MPD Rating 1200.0 A Switchboard "MMA" PANEL LB1 EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MSB" 480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 2000A, 65KAIC EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "MMA" 480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 1200A, 100KAIC (SET AT 175.0A)(SET AT 175.0A) Fault at Device: 25192.88 A Total Voltage Drop: -1.30 % Incident Energy: 8.05 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 59 inches Connected Load 392.80 kVA CBL HA 2 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #2 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 400.0 ft PANEL HA Fault at Device: 10070.44 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.67 % Incident Energy: 1.26 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 19 inches Connected Load 232.00 kVA CBL T-MDF(P) 1 Set(s) of: #4 AWG Conductors, #8 Ground Wire In 1" Conduit Length: 120.0 ft HA-CB1 70.0 A Frame 70.0 A Trip S P T-MDF Fault at Device: 2847.31 A Z% 3.37 % LF VD% 2.81 % Nominal kVA 45 kVA Utilization 83.43 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL MDF 1 Set(s) of: #1/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL MDF Fault at Device: 2804.17 A Total Voltage Drop: 4.11 % Incident Energy: 4.89 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 43 inches Connected Load 36.00 kVA MDF_MAIN 150.0 A Frame 150.0 A Trip CBL HB 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 240.0 ft PANEL HB Fault at Device: 9031.24 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.80 % Incident Energy: 0.24 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 7 inches Connected Load 50.00 kVA CBL T-LB(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HB-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LB Fault at Device: 5118.35 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.28 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 8.89 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LB 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LB Fault at Device: 5035.98 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.51 % Incident Energy: 9.57 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 66 inches Connected Load 6.70 kVA LB_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip Fault at Device: 4852.63 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.50 % Incident Energy: 9.17 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 64 inches Connected Load 5.70 kVA CBL HC 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 540.0 ft PANEL HC Fault at Device: 5510.56 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.48 % Incident Energy: 0.97 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 16 inches Connected Load 94.50 kVA CBL T-LC(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HC-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LC Fault at Device: 4423.26 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 2.08 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 65.04 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LC 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LC Fault at Device: 4361.62 A Total Voltage Drop: 2.62 % Incident Energy: 0.07 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 3 inches Connected Load 47.50 kVA LC_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip CBL HG 1 Set(s) of: #2/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 850.0 ft PANEL HG Fault at Device: 2759.72 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.05 % Incident Energy: 4.15 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 39 inches Connected Load 32.20 kVA CBL T-LG(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HG-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LG Fault at Device: 3291.06 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.09 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 2.94 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LG 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft LG Fault at Device: 3256.72 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.15 % Incident Energy: 5.8 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 48 inches Connected Load 2.20 kVA LG_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HH 2 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #1 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 980.0 ft PANEL HH Fault at Device: 5884.12 A Total Voltage Drop: 1.46 % Incident Energy: 0.84 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 14 inches Connected Load 150.90 kVA CBL T-LH(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HH-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LH Fault at Device: 4524.08 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.91 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 28.42 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LH 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LH Fault at Device: 4459.64 A Total Voltage Drop: 2.40 % Incident Energy: 8.33 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 60 inches Connected Load 20.80 kVA LH_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HJ 2 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #2 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 750.0 ft PANEL HJ Fault at Device: 6439.87 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.78 % Incident Energy: 0.65 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 12 inches Connected Load 33.10 kVA CBL T-LJ(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HJ-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LJ Fault at Device: 4653.73 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.66 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 20.65 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LJ 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LJ Fault at Device: 4585.47 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.10 % Incident Energy: 8.6 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 62 inches Connected Load 15.50 kVA LJ_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HK 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 550.0 ft PANEL HK Fault at Device: 5428.24 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.05 % Incident Energy: 1.01 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 16 inches Connected Load 67.00 kVA CBL T-LK(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HK-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LK Fault at Device: 4399.91 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.29 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 8.96 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LK 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LK Fault at Device: 4338.91 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.25 % Incident Energy: 8.07 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 59 inches Connected Load 6.70 kVA LK_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HL 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 320.0 ft PANEL HL Fault at Device: 7389.10 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.53 % Incident Energy: 0.44 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 10 inches Connected Load 61.60 kVA CBL T-LL(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HL-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LL Fault at Device: 4849.89 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 1.11 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 34.75 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LL 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LL Fault at Device: 4775.83 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.62 % Incident Energy: 9.01 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 64 inches Connected Load 25.90 kVA LL_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HM 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 75.0 ft PANEL HM Fault at Device: 16997.35 A Total Voltage Drop: -1.26 % Incident Energy: 0.3 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 8 inches Connected Load 26.80 kVA CBL T-LM(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HM-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LM Fault at Device: 5819.29 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.33 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 10.31 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LM 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LM Fault at Device: 5713.25 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.92 % Incident Energy: 11.07 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 72 inches Connected Load 7.80 kVA LM_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip Fault at Device: 25807.74 A Total Voltage Drop: -1.34 % Incident Energy: 28.95 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 132 inches Connected Load 642.70 kVA CBL T-LA(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HA-CB2 175.0 A Frame 175.0 A Trip S P T-LA Fault at Device: 5548.10 A Z% 4.49 % LF VD% 2.75 % Nominal kVA 112.5 kVA Utilization 64.49 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LA 1 Set(s) of: #600 kcmil Conductors, #2 Ground Wire In 3-1/2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft LA_MAIN 400.0 A Frame 400.0 A Trip PANEL LA Fault at Device: 5484.87 A Total Voltage Drop: 3.48 % Incident Energy: 10.56 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 70 inches Connected Load 70.00 kVA CBL LA1 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LA1 Fault at Device: 5291.62 A Total Voltage Drop: 3.56 % Incident Energy: 10.13 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 68 inches Connected Load 34.20 kVA LA_1 200.0 A Frame 200.0 A Trip CBL HE 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 410.0 ft PANEL HE Fault at Device: 6047.53 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.01 % Incident Energy: 0.78 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 14 inches Connected Load 74.70 kVA CBL T-LE(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HE-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LE Fault at Device: 4560.65 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 2.30 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 71.97 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LE 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LE Fault at Device: 4495.06 A Total Voltage Drop: 2.37 % Incident Energy: 8.4 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 61 inches Connected Load 52.70 kVA LE_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL HF 2 Set(s) of: #2/0 AWG Conductors, #3 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 640.0 ft PANEL HF Fault at Device: 6452.78 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.52 % Incident Energy: 0.65 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 12 inches Connected Load 49.20 kVA CBL T-LF(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HF-1 100.0 A Frame 100.0 A Trip S P T-LF Fault at Device: 4656.24 A Z% 3.20 % LF VD% 0.38 % Nominal kVA 75 kVA Utilization 11.98 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LF 1 Set(s) of: #4/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LF Fault at Device: 4587.83 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.13 % Incident Energy: 8.6 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 62 inches Connected Load 9.00 kVA LF_MAIN 225.0 A Frame 225.0 A Trip CBL T-HEV(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 100.0 ft HH-2 175.0 A Frame 175.0 A Trip S P T-HEV Fault at Device: 4437.30 A Z% 4.49 % LF VD% 4.70 % Nominal kVA 112.5 kVA Utilization 109.91 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL HEV 1 Set(s) of: #600 kcmil Conductors, #2 Ground Wire In 3-1/2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL HEV Fault at Device: 4397.13 A Total Voltage Drop: 6.84 % Incident Energy: 8.19 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 60 inches Connected Load 115.20 kVA HEV_MAIN 400.0 A Frame 400.0 A Trip CBL HN 1 Set(s) of: #1/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 560.0 ft PANEL HN Fault at Device: 3428.64 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.33 % Incident Energy: 0.11 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 4 inches Connected Load 29.60 kVA CBL T-LN(P) 1 Set(s) of: #10 AWG Conductors, #10 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HN-1 25.0 A Frame 25.0 A Trip S P T-LN Fault at Device: 1306.36 A Z% 2.78 % LF VD% 0.22 % Nominal kVA 15 kVA Utilization 7.99 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LN 1 Set(s) of: #6 AWG Conductors, #8 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LN Fault at Device: 1277.12 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.10 % Incident Energy: 2 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 25 inches Connected Load 1.20 kVA LN_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip CBL HQ 1 Set(s) of: #1/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 500.0 ft PANEL HQ Fault at Device: 3798.23 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.60 % Incident Energy: 0.08 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 3 inches Connected Load 23.90 kVA CBL T-LQ(P) 1 Set(s) of: #10 AWG Conductors, #10 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HQ-1 25.0 A Frame 25.0 A Trip S P T-LQ Fault at Device: 1327.01 A Z% 2.78 % LF VD% 0.07 % Nominal kVA 15 kVA Utilization 2.65 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LQ 1 Set(s) of: #6 AWG Conductors, #8 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft PANEL LQ Fault at Device: 1296.92 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.53 % Incident Energy: 2.04 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 25 inches Connected Load 0.40 kVA LQ_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip CBL HR 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 760.0 ft PANEL HR Fault at Device: 3580.22 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.39 % Incident Energy: 0.1 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 4 inches Connected Load 28.90 kVA CBL T-LR(P) 1 Set(s) of: #10 AWG Conductors, #10 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft HR-1 25.0 A Frame 25.0 A Trip S P T-LR Fault at Device: 1312.16 A Z% 2.78 % LF VD% 0.09 % Nominal kVA 15 kVA Utilization 3.32 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LR 1 Set(s) of: #6 AWG Conductors, #8 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft LR_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip CBL HT 1 Set(s) of: #3/0 AWG Conductors, #4 Ground Wire In 2" Conduit Length: 960.0 ft S P T-LT Fault at Device: 1265.29 A Z% 2.78 % LF VD% 0.07 % Nominal kVA 15 kVA Utilization 2.66 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL LT 1 Set(s) of: #6 AWG Conductors, #8 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft LT_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip PANEL LR Fault at Device: 1283.13 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.29 % Incident Energy: 2.01 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 25 inches Connected Load 0.50 kVA PANEL LT Fault at Device: 1238.20 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.26 % Incident Energy: 1.93 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 24 inches Connected Load 0.40 kVA PANEL HT Fault at Device: 2900.93 A Total Voltage Drop: -0.33 % Incident Energy: 0.19 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 6 inches Connected Load 24.30 kVA HT-1 25.0 A Frame 25.0 A Trip CBL T-LT(P) 1 Set(s) of: #10 AWG Conductors, #10 Ground Wire In 3/4" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft S P T-EV Fault at Device: 5961.63 A Z% 4.49 % LF VD% 3.11 % Nominal kVA 112.5 kVA Utilization 72.75 % Pri Tap 0.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 480 V Sec RatedVoltage 208 V CBL EV 1 Set(s) of: #600 kcmil Conductors, #2 Ground Wire In 3-1/2" Conduit Length: 5.0 ft EV_MAIN 60.0 A Frame 60.0 A Trip PANEL EV Fault at Device: 5888.53 A Total Voltage Drop: 2.26 % Incident Energy: 0.1 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 4 inches Connected Load 80.00 kVA CBL T-EV(P) 1 Set(s) of: #2/0 AWG Conductors, #6 Ground Wire In 1 1/2" Conduit Length: 100.0 ft Fault at Device: 24559.95 A Total Voltage Drop: -1.30 % Incident Energy: 8.49 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 18 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 61 inches Connected Load 416.00 kVA PRIMARY METERING CABINET SPARESPARE SPARE SPARE MVSG-1 50/51-6 Open MVSG-1 52-6 Rating 600.0 A MVSG-1 50/51-3 Open MVSG-1 52-3 Rating 600.0 A MVSG-1 50/51-4 Open MVSG-1 52-4 Rating 600.0 A MVSG-1 50/51-5 Open MVSG-1 52-5 Rating 600.0 A MVSG-1 52-2 MVSG-1 50/51-2 GND SW 89 GND SW 89 GND SW 89 GND SW 89 GND SW 89 6" SPARE CONDUIT TO BE STUBBED AND CAPPED ABOVE-GRADE (TYP.) Rating 600.0 A CBL MSB 6 Set(s) of: 4 - #400 kcmil (90° CU) Conductors, 1 - #1/0 CU Ground Wire In 3" Conduit Length: 90.0 ft CBL MMA 2 Set(s) of: 8 - #400 kcmil (90° CU) Conductors, 1 - #2/0 CU Ground Wire In 4" Conduit Length: 115.0 ft DLX8-XFMR-BLDG S P BAYONET Rating 100.0 A CLF Rating 165.0 A GND SW 89 VOLTAGE SENSING CPT Trip 125.0 A DLX8-MVSG-1 CBL DLX8-MVSG-1 2 Set(s) of: 3 - #350 KCMIL AL Conductors (15kV, MV-105), In 6" Conduit Length: 20.0 ft CBL DLX8-XFMR-BLDG 1 Set(s) of: 3 - #2 AL Conductors (15kV, MV-105), 1 - #6 CU (600V) Ground Wire In 6" Conduit Length: 20.0 ft DLX8-MVSG-1 600A, NEMA-3R, 6-WAYS MV UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR RATED: 12,500 AIC, 15.5kV, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, BIL 95kV TEMP CBL GEN MSB Length: 40.0 ft 2 Set(s) of: 4 - #350 kcmil Conductors, 1 - #1 AWG Ground Wire TEMPORARY PORTABLE GENERATOR 480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 500KW PROVIDE WITH 600A OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEMP CBL GEN MMA Length: 60.0 ft 1 Set(s) of: 4 - #500 kcmil CU Conductors, 1 - #3 AWG CU Ground Wire TEMPORARY PORTABLE GENERATOR 480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 320KW PROVIDE WITH 400A OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4 12000V, 3PH, 3W, 600A, 60HZ, 40KA ASYM KWH PT О | SC FU PT CT TS1 751 SEL TS1 TS1 SCTB 1A FUPTFU 80A MCCB 5A FU INTLK TO INTERNAL 120V CIRCUITS (HEATERS, LIGHTS & RECEPTACLES) 12000V, 3PH, 3W, 600A, 60HZ, 40KA ASYM PT ACCESS KLKL (2) (2)DOOR (2) 0.5E UTILITY (SCE) INCOMING CABLE SIZE #500 KCMIL AL CABLE/PH 1 CT 600/5A (3) VCB-25KA 15KV, 600A UTILITY PROVIDED CT'S AND PT'S PER UTILITY REQUIREMENTS CT SIZE: 10-800A CPT-15KVA 12000V-120/240V PT 12000V-120V CPT METER UTILITY CUSTOMER Line to Line Contribution: 6863.00 A Line to Ground Contribution: 6349.00 A Rated Voltage: 12000 V Fault at Device: 6863.00 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.61 % Incident Energy: 15.85 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 36 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 187 inches Connected Load 1058.70 kVA Fault at Device: 6859.64 A Total Voltage Drop: 0.61 % Incident Energy: 15.85 Cal/cm^2 Working Distance: 36 inches Arc Flash Boundary: 187 inches Connected Load 1058.70 kVA Fault at Device: 27453.40 A Z% 5.75 % LF VD% -2.17 % Nominal kVA 1500 kVA Utilization 65.66 % Pri Tap -5.00 % Pri RatedVoltage 12000 V Sec RatedVoltage 480 V DLX8-MV-UMC 1 3 5 7 2 10 9 8 6 12 11 4 TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTION. TO BE REMOVED UPON PROJECT COMPLETION. SEE IMPLEMENTATION PLAN. TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTION. TO BE REMOVED UPON PROJECT COMPLETION. SEE IMPLEMENTATION PLAN.13 11 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL FEEDERS ARE COPPER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. HALFTONE LINES DENOTES EQUIPMENT/FEEDERS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. 3. IF POSSIBLE, UTILIZE EXISTING PROVISIONS FOR BUS TAPS (INDICATED IN KEYNOTES #9 AND #11) WITHOUT REQUIRING NEW HOLES OR MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING SWITCHBOARDS' EQUIPMENT. OTHERWISE, IF MODIFICATIONS TO AN EXISTING SWITCHBOARDS' EQUIPMENT MUST BE MADE, THEN THE ALTERED SWITCHBOARD(S) MUST BE RE-CERTIFIED BY A FIELD EVALUATION BODY SUCH AS A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL) PRIOR TO RE- ENERGIZING WITH TEMPORARY OR UTILITY POWER. #KEYNOTES: 1. CONNECTION TO UTILITY. SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF 12,000 VOLTS. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH SERVING UTILITY, SOUTH CALIFORNIA EDISON. PHASE TO PHASE FAULT AVAILABLE (MAXIMUM) SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: 6863 AMPERES (X/R = 4.90). PHASE TO GROUND FAULT AVAILABLE (MAXIMUM) SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: 6349 AMPERES (X/R = 2.08). 2. THE METERING SECTION REQUIRES PROVISIONS FOR (2) CTS, (2) PTS AND (3) FUSES FOR METERING PHASES A & C ONLY, THUS BUSBARS FOR PHASE B ARE REQUIRED. A 15-CLIP METER SOCKET IS ACCEPTABLE. 3. PROVIDE ONE (1) SET OF THREE (3) #2 ALUMINUM, 15KV CONDUCTORS AND ONE (1) #1 CU GROUND CONDUCTOR (600V) IN 6" CONDUIT. SEE DUCT BANK DETAIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4. REFER TO CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER CONNECTION DETAIL ON SHEET EV6.00. 5. PROVIDE ONE (1) SET OF THREE (3) #2 ALUMINUM, 15KV CONDUCTORS AND ONE (1) #6 CU GROUND CONDUCTOR (600V) IN 6" CONDUIT. SEE DUCT BANK DETAIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 6. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAP SWITCH, 4-POSITION T-BLADE, SECTIONALIZING LOAD BREAK SWITCH. PROVIDE UNUSED POSITION WITH 6" SPARE CONDUIT TO BE STUBBED AND CAPPED ABOVE-GRADE. 7. PROVIDE SIX (6) SETS OF FOUR (4) #400KCMIL CU, AND ONE (1) #1/0 AWG CU GROUND CONDUCTOR IN 3" CONDUIT. SEE DUCT BANK DETAIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) SETS OF EIGHT (8) #400KCMIL CU, AND ONE (1) #2/0 AWG CU GROUND CONDUCTOR IN 4" CONDUIT. SEE DUCT BANK DETAIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 9. PROVIDE A BUS TAP ALONG THE EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD BUS FOR A TEMPORARY 600-AMPERE CONNECTION. 10. PROVIDE TWO (2) SETS OF FOUR (4) #350KCMIL CU, AND ONE (1) #1 CU GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTION. PROVIDE #2/0 AWG CU GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR AND REFER TO GENERATOR GROUNDING DETAIL ON SHEET EV6.00 FOR ADDTIONAL INFORMATION. PROVIDE PROTECTION AND SUPPORT AS REQUIRED BY CEC 590.4. 11. PROVIDE A BUS TAP ALONG THE EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD BUS FOR A TEMPORARY 400-AMPERE CONNECTION. 12. PROVIDE ONE (1) SET OF FOUR (4) #500KCMIL CU, AND ONE (1) #3 AWG CU GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTION. PROVIDE #1/0 AWG CU GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR AND REFER TO GENERATOR GROUNDING DETAIL ON SHEET EV6.00 FOR ADDTIONAL INFORMATION. PROVIDE PROTECTION AND SUPPORT AS REQUIRED BY CEC 590.4. 13. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE APPROPRIATE STACKED LUGS FOR SECONDARY CONDUCTORS. AT NO POINT SHOULD AN ENERGIZED TRANSFORMER AND A GENERATOR BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME BUS. 1. THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR THE BUILDING SHALL REMAIN IN SERVICE UNTIL ALL COMPONENTS OF THE TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTIONS, EXCEPT FOR THE BUS TAP AND ENERGIZATION OF THE GENERATORS, ARE PROVIDED. 2. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE OUTAGE FOR THE BUILDING WITH OWNER AND UTILITY. 3. DEACTIVATE (SWITCH OFF) THE EXISTING SWITCHBOARDS' ("MSB" & "MMA") MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER AND LOCKOUT IN THE OPEN POSITION (PROVIDE LOCKOUT AS REQUIRED). 4. AFTER EXISTING BUILDING TRANSFORMER HAS BEEN DE-ENERGIZED, PROVIDE BUS TAPS TO EXISTING SWITCHBOARDS. 5. FINALIZE TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS AND ENERGIZE TEMPORARY GENERATORS. 6. UPON PROJECT COMPLETION, CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE OUTAGE FOR THE BUILDING WITH OWNER. DE-ENERGIZE AND REMOVE TEMPORARY GENERATORS. 7. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL COMPONENTS OF THE TEMPORARY POWER CONNECTIONS. 8. UNLOCK AND ACTIVATE (SWITCH ON) EXISTING MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS. IMPLEMENTATION PLAN: 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 9/ 1 9 / 2 0 2 5 2 : 0 8 : 3 7 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . r vt EV6.01 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. NOT TO SCALEEV6.01 1 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/11 Issue for Permit 2025/04/21 Plan Check Repsonse 1 1 2025/09/19 1 1 1 1 9-24-2025 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 04 / 1 7 / 2 0 2 5 4 : 4 3 : 2 0 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . rv t EV7.00 SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Notes: Demand Current:123 A Demand Load:2551 kVA Connected Current:123 A Spare 2551000 VA 100.00% 2551000 VA Connected Load:2551 kVA Load Classification Connected Factor Demand Panel Totals Load Summary 6 SPARE 600 600 3 0 5 SPARE 600 600 3 0 4 SPARE 600 600 3 0 3 FUTURE EV 600 100 3 1360000 2 DLX8-XFMR-BLDG 600 90 3 1191000 1 MAIN 600 600 3 0 Ckt Description Frame (A) Trip (A) Poles FN/Note Load Features & Modifications:SCCR:12.5K Enclosure:NEMA 3R Mains Rating:N/A Mounting:PAD MOUNTED Mains Type:VFI Supply:PRIMARY METERING CABINET Wire:3 Location:BUILDING EXTERIOR Phase:3 Voltage:12000 DLX8-MVSG-1 DEMAND + FUTURE INITIATIVES ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT CODE EQUIPMENT TYPE PHASE CREATED DLX8-MV-UMC PRIMARY METERING CABINET DESIGNED AS PER UTILITY REQUIREMENTS PHASE 0 DLX8-MVSG-1 6-WAY PADMOUNT UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR, 15.5KV, 12.5KAIC, 600A BUS CURRENT RATING, 95 BIL PHASE 0 DLX8-XFMR-BLDG 1500 KVA FLUID FILLED TRANSFORMER. 12.0KV-480/277V YGRD, OIL IMMERSED, WITH INTEGRAL LBOR SWITCH AND FUSE. COORDINATE CONCRETE WORK WITH CIVIL.PHASE 0 PHASE 0: 3 Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 Issue for Permit 2025/04/17 2025/04/17 SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Conditions. 1.02 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. All requirements incorporated under this section shall comply with General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, latest form and amendments including any Supplementary General Condition and Provisions. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other sections of Divisions 26. B. All other divisions of the contract documents. Refer to each division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ADA - American with Disabilities Act B. ASA - American Standard Association C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers D. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials E. CS - Commercial Standards F. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers G. NEC - National Electrical Code H. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association I. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association J. IBC - International Building Code K. UL - Underwriters’ Laboratories 1.05 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 and Divisions 26. If conflict exists between Division 01 and 26 adhere to the more stringent. If a contradiction occurs follow Division 01. B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. C. Contractor shall, within 21 calendar days after issuance of work order, submit to Owner and Engineer, PDF brochures of equipment and materials to be furnished. Non-fabricated items such as wire, insulation, etc., will be listed with manufacturer and type, correlating information submitted to particular items designated on drawings or in specifications. Each set of submittal shall be initialed by contractor to indicate his knowledge of contents and as certification that he has checked it in detail for compliance with contract documents. D. Brochures shall be specific and complete in detail with dimensional drawings on items of equipment as listed in each section of specifications. Specific items that are being submitted on shall be clearly defined with pertinent data underlined in ink or highlighted on all copies. Information shall be initialed by contractor to indicate his knowledge of contents and as certification that he has checked it in detail for compliance with correct documents. Information shall be presented so a line-by-line comparison may be made with drawings and specifications. Deviations from drawings and specifications shall be enumerated. Data of a general nature will not be acceptable. E. Submittals shall be compiled from official manufacturer's brochures with all information necessary to prove equipment submitted is equal to or greater than that specified. Typed form letter altering equipment published values will not be accepted unless accompanied with test results from an independent lab. F. Shop drawings shall be submitted whenever materials and equipment proposed varies in physical size and arrangement from that shown on the drawings, thus causing rearrangement of equipment space; where tight spaces require extreme coordination between ductwork, piping, and other equipment, and where specifically requested by Architect, shop drawings shall be made at no additional charge to Owner. Required shop drawings, except as hereinafter specified, shall be prepared by contractor at a scale no smaller than 1/4 inch = 1 foot. Submit one each blueline print and reproducible sepia of each shop drawing for approval. G. Submit shop drawings in sufficient time so no delay or changes in construction are necessitated due to lack of information. Contractor's failure to comply with this shall render him liable for expense of all delays occasioned by failure on his part to provide the necessary information and/or drawings. The Architect and Engineer reserve the right to go directly to manufacturer to secure details deemed necessary, charging the contractor for costs incurred. H. Approval rendered on shop drawings or submittals is not a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. When approved, said approval does not mean drawings have been checked in detail and does not relieve contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by Contract drawings and specifications. I. Replace items which are rejected for failure to comply with specifications and drawings with an acceptable item. If no satisfactory item is submitted, Architect and Engineer reserve the right to notify contractor as to type and make of materials to be provided. J. Contractors shall submit all necessary manufacturer's shop drawings and wiring diagrams for any equipment which is to be purchased or fabricated as required, specified or indicated on the electrical drawings. The contractor shall submit all necessary drawings before purchasing any equipment and before any fabrication is to be undertaken. Each contractor shall first submit eight (8) copies of all drawings to the Owner and Engineer for approval. When drawings are reviewed, the Engineer will mark his comments and/or approval on eight (8) copies, retaining one for his files and returning the balance to the contractors. Only after receipt of approved drawings, shall the contractor proceed with the purchasing of equipment and fabrication. K. The approval of shop drawings by the Engineer shall not release the contractor from the intent of the plans and specifications. L. The Contractor shall furnish complete submittals for each of the following listed items of electrical equipment in accordance with Division 1. For convenience, the Contractor may submit shop drawings in groups. The groups are listed below: 2. Conduit, Boxes & Fittings 3. Wire 4. Nameplate Samples & Schedule 6. Grounding Devices 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND CODES A. The entire electrical system installation shall comply with all regulations applying to the latest edition of National Electrical Code and its local amendments, where such standards and regulations do not conflict with Municipal and State Building and Fire Safety Codes, including any regulations of the Local Public Utility Company and Municipal Water Department. B. Material furnished and work installed shall comply with National Fire Code of the NFPA; with requirements of local utility companies; and with requirements of governmental departments having jurisdiction. C. In addition to state and local ordinances, the following industry standards apply, where applicable, except where requirements of specifications are more stringent than the following standards: A. ADA - American with Disabilities Act B. ASA - American Standard Association C. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials D. CS - Commercial Standards E. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers F. NEC - National Electrical Code G. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association H. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association I. IBC - International Building Code O. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories D. This electrical installation shall comply with: 1. All laws applicable to the electrical installation, which are enforced by local authorities. 2. The latest edition of the National Electrical Code. 3. The regulations of the Electric Utility Company. E. After completion of the work, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the Electric Utility Company, for the Owner, a certificate of final review and approval from the inspection bureau having jurisdiction. F. Electrical Contractors proposing to undertake work under this division shall review the drawings and specifications subsequent to the approval for permit by the local authorities, noting any and all comments, changes or additions to the work herein described, and immediately notify the Electrical Engineer for proper coordination with his work and that of other divisions. The same shall apply for any similar circumstances arising during construction, prior to the completion of work. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on drawings, unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Owner before proceeding. C. The contractor under this section is invited to visit the site before submitting his bid so that he will become thoroughly familiar with all conditions present directly related to his work. No allowance will be made due to the lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. Each contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field prior to submitting his base bid or starting any phase of his work. D. Contractor shall verify exact locations and depths before starting work. Should conditions be found different than indicated during the course of the work, notify the Architect immediately. Use extreme caution so as not to damage or break lines that are in use. If breakage does occur, Contractor shall be responsible for all resulting damages and repairs. All unusual conditions with respect to existing facilities shall be brought to the Architect’s attention immediately. E. Contractors proposing to undertake work under this Division shall: 1. Visit the site of the work, and fully familiarize themselves of all conditions that affect the work or cost thereof. 2. Examine the drawings and specifications as related to the site conditions. 3. Acquaint themselves with all utility companies from whom services shall be supplied; verify locations of utility service points, demarcations and interfaces and determine exact requirements. 4. Notice: Consideration will not be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the amount of work to be performed. Tender of proposal shall convey full agreement and understanding to all items and conditions specified, indicated on the drawings, and required by nature of the site. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 01. 1.09 GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR A. The terminology "General Contractor" shall be interpreted as being the person or persons, partnership, corporation or other business enterprises, under contract, and engaged with building structure complete with all electrical systems including all site utility work with all structures and improvements thereon. B. The terminology "Subcontractor" shall be interpreted as being the person or persons, partnership, corporation or other business, under contract, and engaged with the sole responsibility of erecting particular phases of the construction work and shall be directly responsible to the "General Contractor." C. The Electrical Contractors shall be interpreted as being "Subcontractors" to the "General Contractor." D. Throughout the Electrical General Requirements Division 26 0500, and Electrical Specifications Sections 26, 27 and 28, the words "Contractor", "Contractors", and "Electrical Contractor" shall be construed as being the subcontractors to the general contractor. E. The General Requirements for the electrical work mentioned under this section shall be related and correlated as applying in its entirety only to the specific part of the work to be performed by each contractor as indicated in "The Scope of Work" and as further described in the specifications of Divisions 26, 27 and 28 for the electrical work. 1.10 COMPENSATION A. Upon the installation by the contractor and acceptance of the electrical work by the owner and Engineers during the various stages and progress of the construction project, the general contractor upon receiving payment due for the installed and approved work shall promptly pay the electrical contractors and any subcontractors for the installation and use of their materials, equipment, labor, business administration, overhead and profit. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY A. As Directed: As directed by Owner, Engineer or his authorized representative. B. Concealed: Inside building above grade and located within walls, furred spaces, crawl spaces, attics, above suspended ceilings, etc. In general, any item not visible or directly accessible. C. Connect: Complete hook-up of item with required services, including conduit, wires, and other accessories. D. Exposed: Either visible or subject to mechanical or weather damage, indoors or outdoors, including areas such as mechanical and storage rooms. In general, any item that is directly accessible without removing panels, walls, ceiling, or other parts of structure. E. Furnish: Supply and deliver complete. F. Install: Place, secure, and connect as required to make fully operational. G. Underground: Buried in ground, including under building slabs; below grade. H. Use (verb): Furnish and install as defined above. I. Provide" shall mean furnish, install and connect complete. J. "Wiring" shall mean electrical conductors for power or signal, installed in conduit, wireway, raceways, or steel duct with all required boxes, fittings, connectors and accessories completely installed. K. "Work" shall be understood to mean all the materials completely installed including labor. L. "Drawings and Specifications" shall be understood to mean the Contract Documents, including all Divisions, Sections and Addenda. M. "Review of Shop Drawings" -See Division 1. N. "Conduit" shall be understood to mean rigid steel, intermediate metal (IMC), electric metallic tubing (EMT), flexible conduit or plastic Schedule 40 PVC conduit. O. "Contractor" shall be understood to mean the Electrical Contractor of record. P. "Engineer" shall be understood to mean the Electrical Engineer of record. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. All Specifications, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, Supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by Owner, are a part of these specifications with accompanying electrical and electrical drawings, and shall be complied with in every respect. Above is included herewith, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall NOT relieve contractor of responsibility or be used as basis for additional compensation due to omission of architectural and/or structural details from electrical and electrical drawings. B. The drawings and specifications do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item necessary for the work as it is assumed that the contractor is expert in the trade and is capable of interpreting them. Small details not usually shown or specified but necessary for this proper installation and finishing, shall be included in the contractor's estimate, the same as if herein specified or shown on plans. The drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. C. In every case where equipment is referred to in the specifications it shall be furnished and installed in complete operating order. The contractor shall install, adjust, and leave in safe operating condition all controls, supplies, appliances, and all necessary mechanical and electrical connections to the equipment to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. D. The contractors are to consider all drawings as schematic or diagrammatical serving only the sole purpose of indicating to the contractor the work expected from him. The final layout of all work shall be subject to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and coordination of all the work under the various divisions and sections of the specifications without any increase in contract price. E. Interrelating of the specifications, drawings, and schedule, is as follows: Specifications determine nature and setting of materials; drawings establish quantities, dimensions and details; and schedules give performance characteristics. F. Should drawings disagree in themselves or with specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, unless otherwise ordered by Architect, in writing. Figures given on drawings govern small scale drawings. G. When mechanical and electrical drawings do not give exact details as to elevation of pipe, conduit, and ducts, physically arrange the systems to fit in space available at elevations intended, with proper grades for functioning of systems involved. H. Exact locations of all outlets and equipment items shall be determined by reference to general plans and to detail drawings, equipment drawings, rough-in drawings, etc. Minor relocations necessitated by conditions at the site or directed by the Architect shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 WORK INCLUDED A. The work consists of furnishing all labor, supplies, materials, sales tax, permits, review fees, costs of tests, shop drawings, as-built drawings, operation & maintenance manuals and performing all operations including installation, cutting and chasing, trenching and back-filling, compaction, coordination with other trades on the job, etc., for the installation of complete electrical systems as shown and hereinafter specified. B. No materials shall be ordered or installed prior to shop drawing review by the Electrical Engineer. C. The electrical drawings are schematic, and are not intended to shown the exact location of conduit, outlets, etc. The Contractor shall refer to the civil, structural drawings and specifications for dimensions and exact requirements and shall fit his work to conform to the details of construction. D. Should conflicts exist between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern. E. The drawings and specifications shall both be considered as part of the contract. Any work or material shown in the one and omitted in the other, or which may fairly be implied by both or either, shall be performed or furnished. G. Labor required to perform warranty work during the warranty period shall be included in this contract. H. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for off-loading, inspection, storage and protection of all materials they furnish. I. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing all claims and return shipments of materials damaged during shipping to the appropriate vendor. J. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing all return shipments of unused materials to the appropriate vendor. K. Credits for damaged or unused materials shall be turned in to the building Owner. 1.14 INTENT/DISCREPANCIES A. Intent of electrical drawings and specifications is to provide an installation complete in every respect. If additional details or special conditions are required, it is the responsibility of contractor to furnish same, as well as provide material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete installation, whether mentioned or not. B. Scope of work under Divisions 26 of specifications shall include complete electrical systems as shown on drawings and as specified herein. The work to be done under these specifications shall include the furnishing of all necessary labor and materials required to complete and leave ready for operation in accordance with these specifications, and the accompanying drawings. The order is not necessarily as it appears in this specification. C. Minor details necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in work as if herein specified or shown. D. Should the Electrical Contractor find discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, or be in doubt as to the intent, he shall immediately obtain clarification from the Electrical Engineer before submitting a proposal for work under this Division. E. It is the electrical contractor’s responsibility to review the drawings and specifications prior to submitting their bid, for compliance with the local regulations of the Electrical Inspection Agency, Fire Inspection Agency and the Local Electric and Telephone Utilities, and to notify the engineer of record immediately of any discrepancies found. F. Electrical Material and Labor costs shall be estimated on a project specific basis without the use of “flat rate” estimating guides from sources such as NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association), or similar. Electrical contractor is directed to acquaint himself with article titled “Changes in the Work”, in the agreement between Owner and Contractor, unit prices requested in Bid Proposal Form and Statement 12, “Change Orders”, in Bid Proposal Form. 1.15 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES - GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONTRACTORS A. The electrical contractor shall include in his bid the costs for the installation of a temporary lighting and power service to the construction site. The temporary service shall be large enough to operate welding equipment and all machinery to be utilized by the various trades. The electrical contractor shall also install all temporary lighting to all construction sheds or temporary construction facilities and structures on the site as required. In addition to the foregoing, the electrical lighting on the construction site grounds and within the building structure for the proper illumination of all areas within the building including corridors and stairwells for the safe passage and installation of all work under various construction trades. The lighting outlets shall provide for a minimum illumination level of 10 foot candles and shall be increased when directed by the general contractor in order to comply with safety requirements throughout the building. B. The existing electrical service is to be retained and expanded, and may be used for temporary/construction power. C. The electrical contractor shall confer with the local utility power company regarding the safe installation of this temporary light band power service. D. The minimum size temporary service shall be rated for 200 amperes for single phase and three phase power tools with voltages as required. Confirm with general contractor on temporary electrical service size prior to submitting bid concerning possible larger size and locations of termination. The electrical contractor shall also make the required arrangements with the local power company for the installation of the permanent facilities as shown. E. The costs for all of the foregoing items as described in each of the foregoing items shall be included in the base bid. 1.16 RULES, PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. Contractor shall give notices, obtain permits and pay fees, government sales taxes, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with his work; file necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver same to Architect before request for acceptance and final payment. B. The contractor shall obtain for his phase of the work all permits and inspections required by the municipal ordinances and after completion of the work shall furnish to the Engineer and the Architect a final inspection certificate and certificate of occupancy from the Inspector of the Building Department. C. The contractor shall assume all expenses for permits, tests, and inspections, and he shall include all these costs in his base bid. D. Contractor shall include, without extra cost to Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, in order to comply with applicable codes, laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, whether or not shown on drawings and/or specified. 1.17 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK A. No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by proper authorities. If work is concealed without inspection and approval, the Contractor shall be responsible for all work required to open and restore the concealed areas in addition to all required modifications. B. Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Owner, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the electrical installation, including any and all special items installed by him or installed under his supervision. 1.18 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner’s option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials and equipment shall be: 1. New and of best grade of standard manufacture. 2. Approved by UL and be so labeled for its specific application. 3. All wire and cable, shall be manufacturer marked as required by Article 310-11 of the NEC. 4. Installed by skilled and licensed electricians and helpers working under the direct supervision of competent experienced foremen and superintendents. 5. Installed in a thorough workmanlike manner, presenting a neat, clean appearance when completed. The electrical contractor shall replace any part or parts not meeting this requirement without extra expense to the Owner. 6. All electrical equipment supplied shall be backed with a minimum of one year warranty from manufacturer. Warranty shall start at substantial completion date. 7. All work performed shall be backed with a minimum warranty of one year from the installing contractor. B. Material and equipment for electrical work shall bear approval label, or shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, and shall be a manufactured item in the United States of America. C. All materials shall be new except where noted to be reused, and shall conform with the latest approved standards of the IEEE, NEMA and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. in every case where such a standard for the particular type of material or equipment has been established. D. Intent of these specifications is to establish quality standards of material and equipment installed. E. All materials and equipment shall be approved by the Architect and Engineer before purchasing and installing by this contractor. Where the phrases "an approved equal" or "or equal" occur in the plans or specifications for materials or equipment, the equivalent shall be decided by the Engineer. A print of all equipment and wiring diagrams shall be turned over to the Engineer for his permanent records. F. Materials, equipment, apparatus or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number and such designation will establish standards of desired quality and style, which will be basis of bid. G. Where a definite product is specified, it is not intended to discriminate against other products, but rather to set a definite standard and indicate quality and capacity of equipment within class found satisfactory for the Owner's use. Products not mentioned by name, or not complying with detailed descriptions in specifications will require approval ten (10) days prior to bid date. Bidders will be notified of approval prior to date of bid opening. Present sufficient written information at initiation of request for approval to enable rendering an expeditious decision. Written request should be initiated with Engineer. H. Where a substitute item alters the design or space requirements indicated on drawings, contractor shall include items of cost for revised design and construction, including cost of allied trades involved. I. Acceptance or rejection of proposed substitutions shall be subjected to Architect and Engineer's approval. If Architect and Engineer so request, contractor shall submit samples of specified and substitute items for inspection. J. Equipment installed on project shall have local representation, local factory-authorized service and local stock repair parts within a radius of 300 miles from the building construction site. K. Timely Placing of Materials and Equipment -Raceways, conduit, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc., shall be installed at the proper time during progress of construction. Coordinate work sequence and interface with other trades. L. Provide all instruments, labor and material required for any essential, intermediate and/or final tests described hereinafter or necessary to prove compliance with these specifications. M. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject any material, equipment, or workmanship not complying with these specifications, and the Contractor shall replace defective work or material immediately upon notification of rejection. Any material so rejected shall be removed from the job within twenty-four (24) hours of such rejection; otherwise, the Owner may have same removed at this Contractor's expense. 2.02 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS A. Where contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on drawings, which requires redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or other parts of the electrical, electrical or architectural layout, such redesign, new drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by contractor at his expense and submitted to Architect and Engineer for approval. B. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, over-current protection, wiring, conduit or equipment, from that specified or indicated on drawings; such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and other additional equipment required by system, shall be provided and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to Owner. C. No deviations from the drawings and specifications shall be made without written approval from the Owner, Project Manager, and Electrical Engineer. Should the Contractor find, at anytime during the progress of the work that, in his judgment, existing conditions make desirable a modification in requirements covering any particular item or items, the Contractor shall report such items promptly to the Project Manager for his decision and instructions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades. Furnish in writing, to allied trades with copies to Architect, information necessary to permit work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily, with minimum of interference and/or delay. B. Where work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. Plan work sufficiently in advance of construction so any conflict can be ascertained and remedial procedures initiated. If adequate solutions can be reached by sleeving or casting into building members, these methods shall be cleared with Architect. If directed by Architect, contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and sections, at scale no less than 1/4 inch = 1 foot, clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to work of other trades. If contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades, causing any interference with work of other trades, he shall make the necessary changes in his work to correct the condition without extra charge. C. Contractor shall furnish, as required, necessary templates, patterns, setting plans and shop details for proper installation of work and for purpose of coordinating adjacent work. D. Each contractor shall cooperate with all sections of the entire specification so that installation of the work shall not interfere or delay the work of other sections nor the progress of the project. Any cutting or repairing made necessary due to negligence or improper workmanship by the contractor or his employees shall be paid for by the contractor. No cutting into the structural parts of the building likely to impair its strength shall be done without the approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer. E. The contractor, before installing any of the work, shall check to determine that the work to be installed does not interfere with the clearances required for finished partitions, pilasters, walls, columns, ceilings and ceiling beams, work of the other trades, both at the site and from the architectural and structural drawings including details. Any work installed by the contractor, which later develops into any difficulties so that the architectural design cannot be followed, shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his own expense. He shall make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect so that the architectural work can be installed as shown on plans and details. 3.02 COORDINATION OF PIPING, CONDUIT AND DUCTWORK A. Piping, conduit and ductwork interference’s shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines, which require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, following order of precedence shall generally be observed unless otherwise directed by the Architect and Engineer and installed for accessibility: 1. Building lines. 2. Structural members. 3. Electrical conduit raceways with accessible outlets, junction boxes and pull boxes. 4. Soil, waste, vent piping with accessible cleanouts. 5. Storm and drainage water piping with accessible cleanouts. 6. Water piping for heating and cooling with accessible valves and pipe fittings. 7. Domestic hot water and potable cold water piping with accessible valves and fittings. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION A. Each contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent in charge of the installation for his phase of the work together with the manufacturer's trained engineering representative to start-up, operate and test out each system and if required with the help of additional personnel. B. Unless otherwise indicated in specifications or drawings, equipment and material shall be installed with approval of Architect and Engineer in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes such tests as manufacturer recommends. C. All equipment indicated on plans and in the specifications shall be furnished and installed in complete operating order. The contractor shall install, adjust and leave in safe operating condition all controls, supplies, appliances and all necessary mechanical and electrical connections to the equipment to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. D. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. Clearances shall be as required by NEC or other applicable code. E. Size of electrical equipment shown on drawings is based on dimension of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers will be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the contractor to determine if equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Shop drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/ Engineer or Owner to indicate a substitute arrangement. 3.04 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND PLATES A. The electrical contractor shall provide and locate sleeves and inserts required before floors, roofs and walls are built, or contractor shall be responsible for cost of cutting and patching required to insert conduit where sleeves and inserts are not installed or where incorrectly located. The contractors may not drill and install mechanical expansion pressure bolts to properly support equipment to be furnished and installed under their contract. When drilling, avoid cutting structural steel rods in concrete ceilings, walls, floors and columns. The type and location of expansion bolt shields shall be approved by the architect, engineer and structural engineer and shall be designed to safely carry and support the intended load. B. Sleeves above grade and dry locations shall be constructed from 20 to 22-gauge galvanized steel and flush on both sides of surfaces. Sleeves on or below grade and/or moist locations shall be constructed of Schedule 40 galvanized steel. C. Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade, pack space between conduit and sleeves with oakum and lead to make completely watertight. D. In each finished space, furnish a chromium plated sectional escutcheon on each conduit penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to lines. Where required, these plates shall be provided with set screws so that they fit snugly against the finished surface. Equipment rooms are classified as exposed areas. 3.05 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect work and material from damage by his work or workmen, and is liable for damage caused by his neglect. B. Contractor is responsible for work and equipment, until finally inspected, tested and accepted. He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage and shall carefully store materials and equipment received which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. C. All conduit and other openings shall be kept protected to prevent entry of foreign matter. Fixtures, equipment and apparatus shall be covered for protection against dirt, water, paint, chemical, or mechanical damage before and during construction. The original finish, including shop coat of paint of fixtures, apparatus, or equipment that has been damaged shall be restored prior to final acceptance. 3.06 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS - GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONTRACTORS A. The general contractor shall be responsible for the establishment of all lines and levels throughout this project. He shall relate the exact horizontal and vertical measurements to each electrical contractor for the correct and proper installation of all materials and equipment under their contract. B. Contractor shall base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. Work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify measurements at site and check correctness of same as related work, prior to fabrication of shop- made item or ordering of factory-made items. C. Should contractor discover a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, which prevents following good practice or intent of drawings and specifications, he shall notify architect and shall not proceed with work until he has received instructions from architect. D. Each electrical contractor will be responsible for all on site field measurements. 3.07 ACCESSIBILITY: GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONTRACTORS A. The general contractor shall be responsible for the proper construction and sizes of all shafts and chases, including increasing of all wall thickness as required to properly install all electrical conduits and equipment, especially panelboards and any other recessed electrical equipment without additional cost to the owner. B. Each contractor shall be certain that the minimum building space has been allotted and left open to properly install any equipment installed under his contract. If required, he shall order his equipment in sections sized to fit the openings and space planned by the Architect. C. The contractors shall inform the general contractor of sufficiency of size of shafts and chases and adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings, for proper installation of his work. Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors working in the same space. Advise general contractor of reworking in the same space. Advise general contractor of requirements and keep spaces and clearances to minimum sizes required. D. Locate equipment, which must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions. Furnish access doors if required. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility; however, changes must be approved prior to installation. E. Provide general contractor with exact location of access panels for each concealed device requiring service or access. Access panels will be provided by general contractor and as specified in the architectural specifications, unless noted otherwise. Location of panels shall be submitted for approval in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of the work. 3.08 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, ATTACHMENTS A. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for the installation of all required foundations, supports (for structural strength), foundations and points of attachment for materials and equipment to be installed by the contractor. B. Each subcontractor shall include all costs for this work in the base bid. C. All necessary steel angles or channel iron, anchor bolts, washers, templates, etc., shall be furnished by each contractor. Bolts shall be built into the foundations with proper sized sleeves. Bases for all equipment shall be satisfactorily isolated from building structure by approved isolation methods. D. Provide necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers, as required and shown on drawings for equipment furnished under this contract. Submit drawings to Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication, or construction. E. For machinery and equipment where foundations are indicated, provide concrete pads as shown. Extend pads 6 inches beyond machine base in all directions; chamfer top edge. Inset 6-inch steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. Submit shop drawings of foundation and pads to Architect and Engineer for approval before constructing, if required. F. Where foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers are mounted on floor, construction shall be same material and quality of finish as adjacent flooring material. G. Securely attach equipment to building structure in approved manner, unless shown otherwise. Attachments shall be strong and durable and if not considered so by the engineer, contractor shall replace as directed without additional cost to the owner. H. Where conduits, wireways, lighting fixtures, transformers, boxes or other electrical equipment are indicated as suspended, the electrical contractor shall provide steel support channel, rods, clamps or other associated devices to securely attach the suspended equipment to substantial structural steel or other similar elements of the building. Penetration thru the roof or walls for this purpose shall not be acceptable. All support systems shall be properly rated as complete assemblies for the weight load and purpose for which they are designed. 3.09 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING - GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONTRACTOR A. Each subcontractor shall furnish all required mechanical equipment including operator to properly hoist all electrical equipment into place on roofs, penthouses, electrical and mechanical rooms, as any other spaces as required. B. Each subcontractor shall also furnish, install and erect all required scaffolding and rigging as required to properly install all electrical work above an eight (8) foot working height, above the finished floor line. C. Each contractor shall remove all their mechanical equipment, hoisting equipment rigging and also scaffolds from the premises when no longer required so as not to interfere with the construction progress of other trades. D. Each contractor shall furnish their own ladders to install electrical equipment up to an eight (8) foot working height. E. Contractor for this Division shall: 1. Be fully responsible for drayage, hoisting, warehousing and demurrage, for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed under this Division. 2. Provide all scaffolding required for erection of materials and equipment included under this Division. 3. Be fully responsible for the safety of his employees using such scaffolding. F. Electrical Contractor shall review all shipments/deliveries of electrical equipment for compliance with approved plans and shop drawings. Any shipments/deliveries accepted by the Electrical Contractor shall be the sole responsibility of the Electrical Contractor for compliance. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The electrical subcontractor shall be responsible for the cutting and patching of all floors, walls, ceilings, roofs as required for the proper installation of all electrical work under this contract. B. No cutting and patching shall be done by the contractors, which in any way will impair the structural strength of the building structure including any joist, walls or structural supporting members. C. The contractors shall not drill any holes or cut into any existing or new structural members. D. Any cutting and patching that is required shall be done only after permission is granted by the architect and structural engineer. E. Contractor for this Division shall provide openings required for work under this DIVISION. 1. Contractor for this Division shall layout, to dimension and location, all openings on surfaces to be formed, framed, or cut. 2. Should Contractor for this Division fail to adhere with the requirement above, as work progresses, any openings required shall be cut and patched by General Contractor at the expense of the Contractor for this Division. 3.11 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. The contractor shall furnish and install all required mechanical equipment, devices, tools, explosives, mats, materials and all required labor for all excavation and backfilling for the installation of any electrical lines which are to be installed by the contractors as applicable to their part of the electrical work. The contractor shall include all required costs under his bid to accomplish such work regardless of the type of materials encountered in excavation. B. Trenches for underground conduit shall be excavated to required depths. Banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable and where required, shall be properly formed and braced. Trenches shall be not less than 12 inches wider than outside diameter of pipe to be laid therein. Bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure maximum fall. Bell holes shall be excavated to assure the pipes resting for its entire length on solid ground. Should rock be encountered, it shall be filled with pea gravel thoroughly tamped. Pipe laid in trenches dug in fill shall be supported down to load bearing undisturbed soil. After approval by inspecting authorities, trenches shall be backfilled. C. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with pea gravel to a depth of 6 inches above top of pipe. Next layer and subsequent layers of backfill may be excavated materials if of earth, loam, sand or gravel free of large clods and rocks no larger than 1-1/2" in diameter. Backfill shall be installed in layers 12 inches deep, adequately tamped, wetted down and water flushed before second layer of earth is laid in place. Additional material required for backfilling shall be furnished and excess material shall be provided as hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings. All trenches under slabs shall be properly compacted to a 98% proctor. D. Excavating and backfilling shall be done in a manner so as not to disturb structures and any shoring required shall be provided by the contractor. E. The contractors shall inform and give the General Contractor all data as to size and depth of trench and locations of required trenches in order to properly install all electrical and telephone service utility liens. Including any electrical lines to and between buildings in order to complete their phase of the construction work. F. Where there is no exact survey data available to the contractor as the exact location of any municipal or utility street lines, the contractor shall make all required exploratory tests to located all or any lines to establish its exact location without additional costs to the owner. G. Before excavating for any municipal or utility street lines, the contractor shall obtain all required permits for this work and he shall notify all municipal and utility authorities of his intent to excavate in order to install all service line to the building site. H. The contractor shall carefully perform all excavation work so as not to damage any municipal or utility street lines including any underground or aerial lines on the premises. The contractor will be held responsible for damage to any lines while performing any phase of the work in order for the contractors to install all required electrical work. The contractor shall pay all costs to repair any damaged municipal or utility service lines without any additional costs to the owner. 3.12 PAINTING - GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONTRACTOR A. The general contractor shall be responsible for the painting of any electrical equipment other than touch up of colors, which are furnished as standard by the equipment manufacturer, which shall be the subcontractors responsibility. The contractors shall place their bid on the use of standard colors shall be approved by the Architect before the contractors purchase the equipment. The contractors shall furnish specific finishes of any equipment when so noted in the specifications or on the drawings. 3.13 STREET BARRIERS, DETOUR SIGNS, BARRIER SIGNAL LIGHTS A. The contractor shall be responsible for the erection of all street barriers, detour signs and barrier signal flashing lights in order to properly fence off his work from traffic and pedestrians and for the safe passage of same. The contractor shall install all of the foregoing mentioned barriers and equipment to comply with all town, municipal and state requirements and regulations. B. Any ground openings wherein work is being performed shall be properly supported and covered with 3/4" or 1" steel plate as required when work is suspended so as not to impede the flow of traffic or safe travelway of pedestrians. C. When required, the contractor shall furnish all costs for labor required to control the flow of traffic and safe travelway for all pedestrians. D. The contractor shall include all costs in his base bid to perform and carry out all of the items mentioned above "only as required" in order for the contractor for the electrical work including any work to be done under his section of the specification documents for this project. 3.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The contractors shall furnish trained operators at no additional expense to the Owner or Architect, to give any required operating instructions to the plant personnel or owner after a final completion and acceptance of the work has been granted under this contract. B. Upon completion of work and tests, instruct Owner (or his representative) in operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment. Give at least forty-eight (48) hours notice. C. Furnish two complete bound sets to Architect, of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining systems and equipment included in this contract. Submit instructions in draft, for approval, prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalog data will not be acceptable as operating and maintenance instructions. D. Include in the above manuals, maintenance schedule for equipment furnished under this contract. 3.15 RECORDS FOR THE OWNER A. The electrical contractor shall turn over to the General Contractor, Architect and Engineer all approved equipment manufacturer's drawings for the entire project, including Equipment Manufacturer's Guarantee, Electrical Contractor's Guarantee and Service Contract Brochure, which is to be turned over to the owners. B. Turn over to the General Contractor, at time of request, for pre-final inspection, two approved bound volumes containing the following information and drawings. Binding to be such that material can be removed. 1. Certificates of acceptance from inspecting authorities. 2. Warranties, guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and materials covered by the contract. Letter from each contractor with blanks for date of acceptance and date of expiration of warranties and guarantees. 3. Approved submittal data. 4. Approved light fixture brochures, including manufacturer's name, catalog number, ballast type and size lamp, plus ordering data, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 5. Approved shop drawings. 6. Other data and drawings required during construction. 7. Repair parts list on major equipment. 8. "As-built" drawings showing routing of underground outside utilities or conduits, with actual dimensions from buildings, in reproducible form. C. Contractor shall accumulate and retain this data and information in neat form during course of project; submit to Architect and Engineer for approval and transmit to Owner to bound volume. D. Record on one set of electrical drawings all changes and deviations from the contract drawings. Record final location of switchboards, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, etc. Make sufficient measurements to locate all major underground conduit runs and show same on record drawings and deliver it to the Owner. E. Transfer changes and deviations to CAD and deliver it to the Owner. 3.16 GUARANTEES A. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, Architect, General Contractor and Owner a guarantee for all equipment and materials installed by each contractor against any defects in workmanship or materials extending for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment to be removed and replaced during this guarantee period shall be done at the contractor's expense. Equipment manufacturer's guarantee shall accompany each submittal for approval, including all equipment manufacturer's whose guarantees extend beyond the one year period. B. Contractor shall amend and make good, at his own expense, any defects, settlements or other faults in the work, arising from defective or improper materials and/or workmanship which may appear within one year after completion and final acceptance of work. Suppliers of equipment shall furnish to the Architect or Engineer, through the contractor and General Contractor a written acceptance and guarantees of equipment furnished. Date of start of warranty shall be the date of final payment, or date the building is accepted by the owners as directed by the Architects. C. The guarantee shall be typewritten on stationery indicating the firm's letterhead and personally signed by the President or other responsible authority of the firm and sealed with the corporate seal. 3.17 SERVICE CONTRACT A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project by the owners, the electrical contractor under this section shall furnish to the Engineer, Architect, General Contractor and Owners a one year service contract to properly service all equipment and materials purchased, fabricated and installed by him. The service contract shall also bind the equipment manufacturers and suppliers as part of the service contract. All costs for this service shall be included in the base bid by the electrical contractors. B. Contractor shall include in the service contract the necessary service to effect repairs to electrical systems, such as mechanical repair of equipment or other work requiring specialized training, for a period of one year, concurrent with guarantee period specified above. C. The service contract shall be typewritten on stationery indicating the firm's letterhead and personally signed by the President or other responsible authority of the electrical contractor's firm and sealed with the corporate seal. 3.18 TESTING A. The owner reserves the right to engage an outside testing agency for the purpose of testing the electrical installation. All costs related to the initial testing will be borne by the owner. Costs for retesting, due to initial failure of the electrical system by the testing agency, will be the responsibility of the contractor. B. The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested by this contractor to insure safety to building occupants, operating personnel, conformity to codes and contract documents. C. All tests shall be performed using recognized safety procedures during energizing and de-energizing of all equipment to ensure personnel safety and equipment protection. D. Tests: Field tests shall be performed and reports submitted. Approval tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. All feeders rated below 600 volts shall be megger tested between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground. Tests shall be made upon completion of all connections, splices and installation of all overcurrent protection devices. Tests shall indicate freedom from short circuits, grounded circuits, reverse polarity, proper phase rotation, etc. 2. All parallel circuits shall be tested for proper phasing or other comparable techniques. 3. Full load currents of each feeder shall be measured and circuit rearrangement provided as necessary to achieve a balanced load on each phase. 4. AC system ground resistance. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 SECTION 26 05 13 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install medium voltage cable. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AEIC CS8, Specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV. 2. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code. 3. ASTM B3, Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 4. ASTM B8, Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft. 5. ASTM B33, Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. 6. ICEA S-93-639, 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cables for use in the Trans- mission and Distribution of Electric Energy. 7. IEEE 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating- Current Cable Terminations 2.5KV through 765KV. 8. IEEE 404, Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500V to 500 000V 9. NETA, Acceptance Testing Procedures. 10. UL 1072, Medium-Voltage Power Cables. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Independent Testing Agency: a. Retain services of independent testing agency for field quality control testing of installed medium voltage cables. b. Testing agency shall have experience inspecting and testing cables of type specified, and shall be a member company of NETA. c. Test Equipment, Calibration and Reporting: Test equipment, instrument calibration, and test reports shall be in accordance with NETA acceptance testing specification. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Tests by Independent Agencies: Cable shall bear label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Literature identifying the methods and materials proposed for making splices and terminations. Submittal shall consist of manufacturer literature evidencing compatibility of conductor insulation, shield, and jacket of cable with splicing or terminating materials, and methods proposed for use. b. Listing of locations where splices are proposed. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature and technical data including information indicating compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification from cable Supplier that cable installation is in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Design Data: Cable pulling calculations from cable Supplier confirming that cable tensions will not be exceeded during installation. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: Submit results of factory tests. Include testing procedures utilized. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: Submit results if field quality control testing. Include testing procedures utilized. 5. Qualifications Statements: a. Qualifications of splicing and termination personnel b. Independent testing agency. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. Include on record documents actual location and routing of medium voltage cable installations. 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 04 / 1 7 / 2 0 2 5 4 : 4 3 : 2 2 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . rv t EV9.00 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 Issue for Permit 2025/04/17 2025/04/17 SECTION 26 05 13 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES (continued) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Cable provided under this Section shall be rated for insulation level of 133 percent at 15kV, 25kV, or 35kV. 2. Cable insulation shall be thermosetting rubber-based suitable for normal installation indoors or outdoors, in conduit, in air, and intermittent or continuous submergence in water. 3. Cable shall be single conductor bearing UL label “MV 105” and comply with or exceed applicable ICEA and AEIC standards. B. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Kerite Company. 2. The Okonite Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Southwire. 5. Or pre-approved equal. C. Materials: 1. Conductor: Conductors shall be soft or annealed uncoated or tinned coated aluminum. 2. Insulation System: Cable insulation system shall include two separate screen layers, primary insulation and shield. a. Conductor screen shall consist of extruded inner layer of non-conduct- ing energy suppression or semi-conducting material. Conductor screen shall be in intimate contact with outer surface of conductor. b. Primary insulation shall be high quality ozone-resistant ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) based compound. Insulation system shall be suitable for use at conductor temperatures not exceeding 90 degrees C for normal operation, 130 degrees C for emergency overload conditions, and 250 degrees C for short circuit conditions. Minimum and maximum thickness of insulation system shall be 85/120 mils for 5kV rated systems and 210/220 mils for 15kV rated systems. c. Insulation screen shall be outer layer of thermosetting semi-conducting material. Insulation screen shall be in intimate contact with outer insulation surface. d. Insulation shield shall be a five-mil copper tape applied helically with minimum 25 percent overlap. 3. Jacket: Continuous jacket of moisture, heat, oil resistant black polyvinyl chloride shall be applied over insulation and shielding system. Minimum thickness of jacket shall be in accordance with ICEA. D. Cable Connectors: 1. Connectors shall be copper, tin-plated, long-barrel compression type and suitable for voltage applications up to 35 KV. 2. For sizes 250 MCM and larger, connectors shall be two-hole mount type with provisions for two bolts for joining to apparatus terminal. 3. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. FCI-Burndy. b. T&B Connectors. c. Or pre-approved equal. E. Cable Terminations: 1. Cable terminations shall comply with Class 1 requirements of IEEE 48. 2. Terminations shall be molded elastomer, cold-shrinkable types with grounding provisions for cable shielding. 3. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Elastimold. b. G&W Electric Company. c. Raychem Corporation. d. 3M Company. e. Or pre-approved equal. F. Cable Splices: 1. Make cable splices using standard splice kits that reinstate cable’s insulation and jacket and continue metallic shielding through entire cable joint. 2. Splices shall be premolded, cold-shrinkable types. 3. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Elastimold. b. G&W Electric Company. c. Raychem Corporation. d. 3M Company. e. Or pre-approved equal. G. Pulling Compound: 1. Provide pulling compound to facilitate wiring pulling. Compound shall be UL-listed, waxed or water based type. Compound shall be compatible with all jacket types. 2. Pulling tension coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0.35. 3. Use winter-grade compound for outdoor, low-temperature installations. 4. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Ideal Industries. b. Greenlee. c. Or pre-approved equal. F. Fireproofing Tape for Cables in Manholes, Handholes, and Boxes: 1. Tape shall be 30-mils thick of self-extinguishing material that does not support combustion. Tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, salt, sewage, or fungus 2. Secure tape with glass cloth tape. G. Color code cables by applying general purpose, flame-retardant tape, wrapped in overlapping turns covering an area of at least two inches. Colors shall be as follows: 1. Phase A: Black. 2. Phase B: Red. 3. Phase C: Blue. 4. Shield: Silver Braided. 5. Equipment Ground (Insulated): Green 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Cables shall be factory tested in accordance with testing standards of ICEA and UL. 2. Conductors shall comply with electrical resistance requirements of ICEA. 3. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ICEA. Each cable shall have an insulation resistance not less than that corresponding to insulation resistance constant of 20,000 megohms-1000 feet at 15.6 deg C. 4. Perform high voltage AC test in accordance with ICEA. 5. Measure and record shield resistance from end to end on completed cable. 6. Corona Test: Each reel of completed shielded power cable shall be partial discharge tested in accordance with ICEA. 7. Record cable physical measurements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cables complete with proper terminations at both ends. Check for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation. B. Splice and terminate medium voltage cables in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Use experienced personnel familiar with materials and procedures to be employed. 2. Make splices watertight for below-grade installations, and submersible in manholes and handholes. C. Pulling: 1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil. 2. Pulling tension shall be within limits recommended by cable manufacturer. 3. Use dynamometer when mechanical means are used. 4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means. D. Bending Radius: Limit to twelve times cable overall diameter. E. Slack: Provide maximum slack at terminal points and in manholes. F. Wrap cables located within manholes, handholes, and boxes with fireproofing tape for cable’s entire length for each individual cable. Secure fireproofing tape with glass cloth tape. Fireproof cables in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations, and cover cables with tape extending at least one inch into each duct. G. Identification: Identify cable conductors at each terminal, manhole and splice location. Identification tags shall be laminated thermoset plastic, 1/16-inch thick, engraved block white letters on black background, square corners, and beveled front edges. Tag shall be secured to cable using non-conductive tie-wraps. H. Each MV cable identification tag shall include the following information; 1. Manufacturer 2. Cable Size 3. Voltage Rating 4. Date installed (MM/YY) 5. From-To Location (Ex: 1A1 to 1A2) 6. Loop number 7. Circuit number 8. Phase I.D. (Ex. Ph.A or Ph.A-C) 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform acceptance testing of medium voltage cable system. Each cable circuit shall be inspected and tested on an individual, per- phase basis. Testing and inspection shall be performed by independent testing agency. 2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect each power cable installation in accordance with NETA acceptable testing specifications. Inspect each splice and termination. 3. Electrical Tests: Perform electrical testing of each power cable in accordance with NETA testing procedures and recommendations of independent testing agency. Testing shall include: a. Shield continuity test. b. DC or AC high potential test. c. Adhere to following procedures before performing over-potential tests: 1) Disconnect all equipment, including but not limited to: transformers, switches, motors, circuit breakers, and surge arrestors from cable circuit to prevent test interruptions due to flashovers or trip-outs resulting from excessive leakage current. 2) Establish adequate clearance between circuit test ends and grounded objects and to other equipment not under test. 3) Ground all circuit conductors not being tested, all cables shields, and nearby equipment. 4) Clean insulation surfaces. 5) Keep cable ends dry. d. Apply high-potential slowly in eight to ten equal steps to 80 percent of manufacturer’s test value. Record leakage current at each test voltage and plot resulting curve on graph paper. e. Stop the test if leakage current increases excessively or if a “knee” appears in the curve before reaching maximum test voltage. f. Upon reaching specified maximum test voltage, maintain voltage for 15 minutes, record leakage current at 30 seconds, one minute, and at one-minute intervals thereafter. Plot leakage current versus time on the same graph as step voltage curve. g. Reduce conductor test potential to zero and measure residual voltage at discrete intervals. h. Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored charge. i. Repair or replace and retest new cable that fails tests. j. Test curves shall be signed by the individual performing tests and submitted to the CONTRACTING OFFICER. 4. Where existing cables are spliced to cables provided under this Contract, new cable shall be high-potential tested prior to splicing. After acceptance of test of new cable, make the splice and insulation-resistance test entire cable. Perform shield continuity test. When tests are positive, perform high-potential test. Test voltage and procedures shall be in accordance with NETA and independent testing agency recommendations. Cable failures shall be brought to attention of the CONTRACTING OFFICER in writing. B. Cable Tension Field Quality Control: Testing and Supplier Services: 1. Provide services at the Site during cable installation to ensure that cable tensions are not exceeded. Provide cable splicing when tension exceeds cable manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide services of cable manufacturer’s representative to prepare cable pulling calculations. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect, monitor, and assist in cable installation, and shall certify that cables have been correctly installed. 3. Required field services include: a. Document, with assistance of manufacturer’s representative, actual conduit installation parameters needed to prepare cable pulling calculations. b. Prepare pulling calculations in advance of cable installation. c. Monitor actual pulling tensions during installation to ensure that recommended tensions are not exceeded. d. Certify jointly with manufacturer’s representativ e that cable installation is in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Provide equipment, coordinate, and identify information necessary to ensure proper installation of cables. Contract Price shall include all costs associated with equipment, coordination, and identification of all information necessary for complete, functional system. END OF SECTION 26 05 13 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each conductor and cable indicating lead content. 2. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. 3. Product Data: For solvents and adhesives, indicating VOC content. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For solvents and adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Okonite Company (The). 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Southwire Company. 9. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 3. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 4. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 5. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 6. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493. 7. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 8. Type EVE and Type EVJE: Comply with UL 62 F. Shield: 1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. C. EV Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. D. EV Branch Circuits above ground: Type XHHW-2 , multi-conductor cable in raceway or cable tray per plans. E. Non-EV Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Foundation steel electrodes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Ltd. 2. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. ILSCO. 5. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Lead Content: Less than 300 parts per million. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals. E. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. F. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. G. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. H. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. J. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. K. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. L. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections. M. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw. N. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. O. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp. P. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. Q. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts. a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. b. Listed for direct burial. 2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct burial. R. Lead Content: Less than 300 parts per million. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet. B. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Refer to plans. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. F. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. G. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 5. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 3. Conduit and cable support devices. 4. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Sockets. e. Eye nuts. f. Fasteners. g. Anchors. h. Saddles. i. Brackets. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded-aluminum channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Flex-Strut Inc. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 4. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 8. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with minimum 13/32- inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. G-Strut. d. Seasafe, Inc.; AMICO, a Gibraltar Industries Company. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 4. Fittings and Accessories: Products provided by channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as those for channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. 7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) B-line, an Eaton business. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 102. 4. NECA 105. 5. NECA 111. B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 10 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 04 / 1 7 / 2 0 2 5 4 : 4 3 : 2 4 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . rv t EV9.01 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 Issue for Permit 2025/04/17 2025/04/17 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (continued) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. c. Anamet Electrical, Inc. d. Electri-Flex Company. e. FSR Inc. f. NEC, Inc. g. Opti-Com Manufacturing Network, Inc (OMNI). 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; aluminum. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. c. Anamet Electrical, Inc. d. Electri-Flex Company. e. NEC, Inc. f. Opti-Com Manufacturing Network, Inc (OMNI). 2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 5. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 6. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression. 7. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Anamet Electrical, Inc. c. CANTEX INC. d. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. e. Condux International, Inc. 2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fiberglass: a. Comply with NEMA TC 14. b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways. c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways. 4. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 5. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 6. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. B. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. CANTEX INC. c. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. d. Condux International, Inc. e. Electri-Flex Company. 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 3. FSR Inc. 4. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 5. Hubbell Incorporated. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: sheet metal. 2. Type: Semi-adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular. 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G. Gangable boxes are allowed. H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. c. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. d. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH SERVING UTILITY. 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: IMC. 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC concrete encased. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT, ENT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: PVC coated RNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, or IMC before rising above floor. M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. N. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Q. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. R. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. S. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. U. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. V. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. W. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 2. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 3. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 4. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. X. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. Y. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Z. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. CC.Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. DD.Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade. E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manholes for exterior underground wiring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Concrete Structures: a. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details, including attachments to other Work. b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes, and methods and materials for waterproofing duct entry locations. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole chimneys. e. Include grounding details. B. Field Quality-Control Submittals: 1. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes, as required by ASTM C858. B. Manufacturers' Published Instructions: Record copy of official installation and testing instructions issued to Installer by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANHOLES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use. 2. General Characteristics: a. ASTM C858 for design and manufacturing processes. b. SCTE 77. B. Precast Concrete Manholes: 1. Description: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. 2. Knockout Panels: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching duct, plus additional 12 inch (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. 3. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. 4. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide 3 inch (75 mm) PVC sleeve in manhole floors 2 inch (50 mm) from wall adjacent to, but not underneath, duct entering structure. 5. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at installation location with ground-water level at grade. 6. Source Quality Control: Test and inspect in accordance with ASTM C1037. C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes: 1. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for duct entrance and sleeve for ground rod. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in field. Notify owner if there is conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain. B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by owner. 3.2 SELECTION OF UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Manholes: Precast or cast-in-place concrete. 1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating in accordance with AASHTO HB 17. 2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating in accordance with AASHTO HB 17. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A. Special Techniques: 1. Cast-in-Place Manholes: a. Finish interior surfaces with smooth-troweled finish. b. Knockouts for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2 to 2 inch (38 to 50 mm) thick, arranged as indicated. c. Comply with requirements in Division 03, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement. 2. Precast Concrete Handholes and Manholes: a. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting duct to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. b. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on level bed of crushed stone or gravel graded from 1 inch (25 mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. c. Field-cut openings for conduits in accordance with enclosure manufacturer's published instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3. Elevations: a. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inch (375 mm) below finished grade. b. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. c. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade. d. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. e. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure. 4. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated. 5. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size. a. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder. b. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings, and cast-iron frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight joints and waterproof grouting for frame and chimney. 6. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes after concrete has cured at least three days. After duct has been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days. 7. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07, "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts are connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days. 8. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes. 9. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inch (97 mm) for manholes and 2 inch (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in field. Use minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion. 10. Ground manholes, handholes, and boxes in accordance with Division 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground duct, duct bank, and utility structures. 2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of- round duct. Provide minimum 12 inch (300 mm) long mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Assemble and submit test and inspection reports. C. Manufacturer Services: 1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to supervise field tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 26 05 43 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 260573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" requirements for arc-flash warning labels. F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Red. b. Phase B: Black. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Color for Neutral: White. 4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe. B. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." D. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Nameplates: White letters on a black field. Labels are to be phenolic type and shall be attached via rivet or screw. 2. Letter Size a. Use 1/4 inch letter for identifying individual voltage and source. b. Use 1/2 inch letter for identifying equipment designation. c. Use 1/4 inch letter for identifying individual circuit breakers, witches and motor starters in panelboards, switchboards, adjustable speed drivers, motor control centers, EV chargers, starters and disconnects. Identify circuit and load served, including location. E. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Champion America. c. Panduit Corp. d. Seton Identification Products. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. G. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. H. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. I. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. J. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. K. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. L. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. M. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions. N. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. 2. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels self-adhesive wraparound labels self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify the phase. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. D. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide with the conductor designation. E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. F. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. G. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Baked-enamel warning signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8- inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. H. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Labels are to be phenolic type and shall be attached via rivet or screw. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Labels are to be phenolic type and shall be attached via rivet or screw. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Panelboard manufacturer to provide a directory of circuits in the location, typewritten on card stock. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Switchgear. c. Switchboards. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Power-transfer equipment. g. Battery-inverter units. h. Power-generating units. i. EV chargers. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 SECTION 26 05 73 - POWER SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes short circuit and protective dev ice coordination study encompassing portions of electrical distribution system from normal power source or sources up to and including disconnect means in service entrance switchboard, disconnect means in sub- distribution panels, and main breaker in each panelboard. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 242 - Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book). B. NFPA: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Use this Article carefully; restrict statements to identify items for inclusion in study. A. Complete Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study to meet requirements of NFPA 70. B. Report Preparation: 1. Prepare study prior to ordering distribution equipment to verify equipment ratings required. 2. Perform study with aid of computer software program. 3. Obtain actual settings for equipment incorporated into Work. 4. Calculate short circuit interrupting and, when applicable, momentary duties for assumed three-phase bolted fault short circuit current and phase to ground fault short circuit current at each of the following: a. Utility supply bus. b. Medium voltage air interrupter switchgear. c. Medium voltage circuit breaker switchgear. d. Secondary unit substations. e. Transfer switches. f. Low-voltage switchgear. g. Switchboards. h. Motor control centers. i. Distribution panelboards. j. Branch circuit panelboards. k. Busway. l. Each other significant equipment location throughout system. C. Report Contents: 1. Include the following: a. Calculation methods and assumptions. b. Base per unit value selected. c. One-line diagram. d. Source impedance data including power company system available power and characteristics. e. Typical calculations. 1) Fault impedance. 2) X to R ratios. 3) Asymmetry factors. 4) Motor fault contribution. 5) Short circuit kVA. 6) Symmetrical and asymmetrical phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault currents. 7) Tabulations of calculation quantities and results. f. One-line diagram revised by adding actual instantaneous short circuits available. g. State conclusions and recommendations. 2. Prepare time-current device coordination curves graphically indicating coordination proposed for system, centered on conventional, full-size, log-log forms. 3. Prepare with each time-curve sheet complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying specific portion of system covered by that particular curve sheet. 4. Prepare detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings. 5. Plot device characteristic curves at point reflecting maximum symmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. Include on curve sheets the following: a. Power company relay characteristics. b. Power company fuse characteristics. c. Medium voltage equipment protective relay characteristics. d. Medium voltage equipment protective fuse characteristics. e. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics. f. Low voltage equipment fuse characteristics. g. Cable damage point characteristics. h. Pertinent transformer characteristics including: 1) Transformer full load current. 2) Transformer magnetizing inrush. 3) ANSI transformer withstand parameters. 4) Significant symmetrical fault current. i. Pertinent motor characteristics. j. Generator characteristics including: 1) Phase and ground coordination of generator protective devices. 2) Decrement curve and damage curve. 3) Operating characteristic of protective devices. 4) Actual impedance value. 5) Time constants. 6) Current boost data. k. Transfer switch characteristics. l. Other system load protective device characteristics. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications Data: Submit the following for review prior to starting study. 1. Submit qualifications and background of the firm. 2. Submit qualifications of a professional engineer performing study. B. Software: Submit for review information on software proposed for use in study. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Report: Summarize results of study in report format including the following: a. Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope of study. b. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties, and commentary regarding same. c. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same. d. Fault current calculations including definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout. D. Submit copies of final report signed by a professional engineer. Make additions or changes required by review comments. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Include the following Paragraph only when cost of acquiring specified standards is justified. A. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Use commercially available software, designed specifically for short circuit and protective device coordination studies with minimum of five years' documented availability approved by Engineer. C. Perform study in accordance with IEEE 242. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Perform study under direct supervision of professional engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California with minimum of five years' experience in power system analysis. B. Demonstrate company performing study has capability and experience to provide assistance during system start up. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Submit short circuit and protective device coordination study to Engineer prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment shop drawings and prior to releasing equipment for manufacturing. B. When formal completion of study will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Engineer for preliminary submittal of study data sufficient in scope to ensure selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule Work to expedite collection of data to ensure completion of study for final approval of distribution equipment shop drawings prior to release of equipment for manufacturing. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with local power company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide assistance to electrical distribution system equipment manufacturer during start up of electrical system and equipment. B. Select each primary protective device for delta-wye connected transformer so device's characteristic or operating band is within transformer characteristics, including point equal to 58 percent of ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line-to-ground fault protection. C. Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves from associated secondary device characteristics by 16 percent current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in event of secondary line-to-line faults. D. Separate medium-voltage relay characteristic curves from curves for other devices by at least 0.4 second time margin. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Perform field adjustments of protective devices and modifications to equipment to place equipment in final operating condition. Adjust settings in accordance with approved short circuit and protective device coordination study. END OF SECTION 26 05 73 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 04 / 1 7 / 2 0 2 5 4 : 4 3 : 2 7 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . rv t EV9.02 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 Issue for Permit 2025/04/17 2025/04/17 SECTION 26 12 00 - LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification covers the electrical and mechanical characteristics of 750-2,500 kVA Three-Phase Step-Down Pad- Mounted Distribution Transformers. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. All characteristics, definitions, and terminology, except as specifically covered in this specification, shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following IEEE®, Department of Energy, and NEMA® standards. 1. IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2015 – IEEE Standard for Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers 2. IEEE Std C57.12.28™ - 2014 standard – Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity. 3. IEEE Std C57.12.29™ - 2014 standard - IEEE Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments – applicable when stainless steel construction is specified. 4. IEEE Std C57.12.34™-2015 standard – Standard Requirements for Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers (2500 kVA and Smaller) - High Voltage: 34500GrdY/19920 Volts and Below; Low- Voltage: 480 Volt 2500 kVA and Smaller (issued in March 2005 - combines IEEE Std C57.12.22 and IEEE Std C57.12.26 standards). 5. IEEE Std C57.12.90™-2010 – IEEE Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers and IEEE Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers 6. IEEE Std C57.12.91™-2011 standard – Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Transformers. 7. IEEE Std C57.154™ -2012 – IEEE Standard for the Design, Testing, and Application of Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers Using High-Temperature Insulation Systems and Operating at Elevated Temperatures 8. NEMA® TR 1-1993 (R2000) – Transformers, Regulators and Reactors, Table 0-2 Audible Sound Levels 9. NEMA 260-1996 (2004) – Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public Areas. 10. 10 CFR Part 431 – Department of Energy–Energy Conservation Program: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; Final Rule 11. IEEE Std 386™-2016 – IEEE Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600 V PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 PRODUCTION TESTING A. All units shall be tested for the following: 1. No-Load (85 °C or 20 °C) losses at rated current 2. Total (85 °C) losses at rated current 3. Percent Impedance (85 °C) at rated current 4. Excitation current (100% voltage) test 5. Winding resistance measurement tests 6. Ratio tests using all tap settings 7. Polarity and phase relation tests 8. Induced potential tests 9. Full wave and reduced wave impulse test B. Transformers shall conform to efficiency levels for liquid immersed distribution transformers, as specified in the Department of Energy ruling “10 CFR Part 431 Energy Conservation Program: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; Final Rule; April 18, 2013.” Manufacturer shall comply with the intent of all regulations set forth in noted ruling. C. In addition, the manufacturer shall provide certification upon request for all design and other tests listed in IEEE Std C57.12.00 ™-2010 standard, including verification that the design has passed short circuit criteria per IEEE Std C57.12.00™-2010 standard and IEEE Std C57.12.90™-2010 standard. 2.02 SHIPPING A. Transformers, 1000 kVA and below, shall be palletized. Transformers, 1500 kVA and larger, shall be loaded and unloaded with overhead cranes, so a pallet is not to be prov ided for these transformers. 2.03 DATA WITH PROPOSAL A. The following data shall be submitted with the proposal: 1. Core losses 2. Winding losses 3. Percent Impedance 4. Typical bid drawing 5. Approval drawing – drawings shall show final dimensions and features. When requested, approval drawings shall be provided per quoted leadtime. 6. Record Drawing – drawings shall show final dimensions and features. When requested, record drawings shall be provided. 2.04 SERVICE A. The manufacturer of the transformer shall have regional service centers located within two (2) hours flight time of all contiguous 48 states. Service personnel shall be factory trained in commissioning and routine service of quoted transformers. END OF SECTION 26 12 19.01 SECTION 26 13 13 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section includes medium-voltage, load-interrupter switchgear and its associated auxiliary equipment. The equipment shall consist of outdoor-non-walk-in type 3R switchgear. B. The switchgear shall use resettable interrupter controls and shall not rely on fuses for overcurrent protection. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for approval and final documentation in the quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be identified by purchaser name, purchaser location and purchaser’s order number. B. Approval documents shall include: 1. General arrangement drawing showing dimensioned elevation and floor plan, foundation details and one-line diagram 2. Panel arrangement drawing showing layout of devices on the panel doors 3. Single-line diagrams 4. Schematics 5. Nameplate engraving drawings 6. Electrical bill of material. C. Final documents shall include: 1. Documents listed in 1.3.B above 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Recommended spare parts list for start-up support 4. Instruction manual. D. Where applicable or required by the Engineer, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies 2. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies 3. Key interlock scheme description and sequence of operations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: The bidder must have at least five years experience in manufacturing medium-voltage switchgear. B. Comply with requirements of latest revisions of applicable industry standards, specifically including the following: 1. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 2. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4 3. ANSI C37.57 4. ANSI C37.58 5. CSA 22.2 No.31-2010 6. CSA 22.2 No.58 – M1989 7. CSA 22.2 No.193 – M1989 C. Listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL or C-UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA) shall be provided for 15kV, 25kV or 35kV class load-interrupter switchgear. D. The manufacturer shall be ISO9001 or 9002 certified for the equipment specified herein. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver in convenient shipping groups. Shipping groups shall not exceed 15 feet in length. B. Bus bars with associated hardware for connections between shipping groups shall be shipped inside one of the units in which it shall be installed. C. Contractor shall store the equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Contractor shall install temporary heaters, if necessary, to prevent condensation during storage. E. Contractor shall handle and move the switchgear in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION A. All nameplates shall be mounted on the front door of each vertical section as specified on the drawing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION. A. General: Electrical contractor or switchgear installer shall install switchgear in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and the following specifications. 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Remove debris from switchgear and wipe dust and dirt from all components. B. Repaint marred and scratched surfaces with touch-up paint to match original finish. 3.3 INSPECTION A. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Check all installed switchgear for proper grounding, fastening and alignment. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed by the installing contractor. B. Visually inspect for physical damage. C. Perform site tests as specified in manufacturer’s instruction manual. D. Touch-up paint to repair any damaged surfaces using manufacturer-furnished paint. Leave remaining touch-up paint with owner. E. Verify operation of interlocks. F. Perform power-frequency withstand voltage tests in accordance with IEEE Std. C37.20.3-2013, clause 6.19. 3.5 WARRANTY A. Equipment manufacturer shall warrant that all goods supplied are free of non-conformities in workmanship and materials for one year from date of initial operation, but not more than 18 months from date of shipment. 3.6 START-UP SERVICE A. Switchgear manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorized service representative for a period of two days to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the following: 1. Procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing and preventive maintenance. 2. Review data in the instruction manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least three week’s advance notice. 3.7 FIELD SERVICE A. The manufacturer of the transformer shall have regional service centers located within two (2) hours flight time of all contiguous 48 states. Service personnel shall be factory trained in commissioning and routine service of quoted transformers. END OF SECTION 26 13 13 SECTION 26 24 13 – SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Surge protection devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Identification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.4 STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. B. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. C. Unusual Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric serv ice without Architect's Construction Manager's Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION A. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections. B. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent bus and components, complete with lettered designations. C. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400. 1. Lift or move panelboards with spreader bars and manufacturer-supplied lifting straps following manufacturer's instructions. 2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not furnished. 3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation. 4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions. B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance of the equipment. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400. B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install conduits entering underneath the switchboard, entering under the vertical section where the conductors will terminate. Install with couplings flush with the concrete base. Extend 2 inches above concrete base after switchboard is anchored in place. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. 6. Anchor switchboard to building structure at the top of the switchboard if required or recommended by the manufacturer. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections. F. Install overcurrent protective devices, surge protection devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Section 262500 "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties. B. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bonding conductor sized per NFPA 70. C. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70. D. Extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a phenolic nameplate displaying the fixture code as shown in the construction documents. C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a phenolic nameplate displaying the fixture code as shown in the construction documents. END OF SECTION 26 24 13 SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nonfusible switches. 2. Shunt trip switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric serv ice without Architect's Construction Manager's Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 2.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2.4 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment serv ed and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. B. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 2.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in "Coordination Studies." END OF SECTION 26 28 16 448 South Hill Street Suite 1001 Los Angeles, CA 90013 Phone: 310-975-2061 Reviewed By:Proj #: 140 Newport Center Drive, Suite 100 Newport Beach, CA 92660 O: 949.478.8800 www.kpff.com KPFF 04 / 1 7 / 2 0 2 5 4 : 4 3 : 2 8 P M A u t o d e s k D o c s : / / D L X 8 / D L X 8 _ M E P . rv t EV9.03 SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL DLX8_EVSG 515 E Dyer Rd, Santa Ana, CA 92707 Owner NM23.0003320.000 1416 NW 46TH Street Suite 105-138 Seattle, WA 98107 WWW.NELSONWORLDWIDE.COM Phone: (206) 408-8501 Nelco Architecture, Inc. Issue: No: Date: CD 30 2023/11/03 CD 50 2024/05/22 CD 90 2025/03/07 Issue for Permit 2025/04/17 2025/04/17 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR THE AMAZON - REI - EVSG - EXTERIOR - DLX8 KPFF Job # 10192300127 DATE: 08/21/25 No part of this document may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of KPFF Consulting Engineers. This document is intended to be used as a reference to facilitate plan review and approval only, and only for this specific project. This document is not part of the construction documents and may not be used by any parties other than KPFF Consulting Engineers and the Review Agency for any purpose without the written consent of KPFF Consulting Engineers. 18400 Von Karman Avenue, Suite 600 Irvine, CA 949.252.1022 kpff.com ISSUE FOR PLANCHECK No. 5913 Exp. 12/31/25 ASCE Hazards Report Address: 515 E Dyer Rd Santa Ana, California 92707 Standard:ASCE/SEI 7-16 Latitude:33.709508 Risk Category:II Longitude:-117.862452 Soil Class:D - Default (see Section 11.4.3) Elevation:52.32759828537548 ft (NAVD 88) Page 1 of 3https://ascehazardtool.org/Tue Apr 15 2025 S-1 SS : 1.274 S1 : 0.456 F a : 1.2 F v : N/A SMS : 1.529 SM1 : N/A SDS : 1.019 SD1 : N/A T L : 8 PGA : 0.54 PGA M : 0.648 F PGA : 1.2 Ie : 1 C v : 1.355 Seismic Site Soil Class: Results: Data Accessed: Date Source: D - Default (see Section 11.4.3) USGS Seismic Design Maps Ground motion hazard analysis may be required. See ASCE/SEI 7-16 Section 11.4.8. Mon Apr 14 2025 Page 2 of 3https://ascehazardtool.org/Tue Apr 15 2025 S-2 The ASCE Hazard Tool is provided for your convenience, for informational purposes only, and is provided “as is” and without warranties of any kind. The location data included herein has been obtained from information developed, produced, and maintained by third party providers; or has been extrapolated from maps incorporated in the ASCE standard. While ASCE has made every effort to use data obtained from reliable sources or methodologies, ASCE does not make any representations or warranties as to the accuracy, completeness, reliability, currency, or quality of any data provided herein. Any third-party links provided by this Tool should not be construed as an endorsement, affiliation, relationship, or sponsorship of such third-party content by or from ASCE. ASCE does not intend, nor should anyone interpret, the results provided by this Tool to replace the sound judgment of a competent professional, having knowledge and experience in the appropriate field(s) of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the contents of this Tool or the ASCE standard. In using this Tool, you expressly assume all risks associated with your use. Under no circumstances shall ASCE or its officers, directors, employees, members, affiliates, or agents be liable to you or any other person for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from or related to your use of, or reliance on, the Tool or any information obtained therein. To the fullest extent permitted by law, you agree to release and hold harmless ASCE from any and all liability of any nature arising out of or resulting from any use of data provided by the ASCE Hazard Tool. Page 3 of 3https://ascehazardtool.org/Tue Apr 15 2025 S-3 project by location date client job no. Component Description Unit & Anchorage Properties W 22400 lb Equipment Weight l 102.0 in Length of Unit w 77.0 in Width of Unit H 63.0 in Height of Unit h 42.0 in Height to C.G. above Base z 0.0 ft Component Height in Structure hr 1.0 ft Mean Roof Height of Structure CGx 38.5 in Center of Mass, width-direction Cgy 51.0 in Center of Mass, length-direction n 6 Anchorage Locations m 1 anchors (at each anchorage location) Seismic Accelerations SDS 1.019 %g Ip 1.00 13.1.3 ap 2 1/2 Table 13.6-1 Rp 6 Table 13.6-1 Ω0 2 Table 13.6-1 Fp,calc 0.17 Wp Eq. 13.3-1 Fp,min 0.31 Wp Controls Eq. 13.3-3 Fp,max 1.63 Wp Eq. 13.3-2 Fv 0.20 Wp 13.3.1.2 Ω0Fp 13,695 lb Ω0Fv 9,130 lb Wind Forces Req'd?No V 95 mph Fig 26.5-1a-c Exp. Cat. B Sec. 26.7.3 h 50 ft Mean Roof Height B 100 ft Width of Roof L 200 ft Length of Roof Elev 0 ft Above Sea Level Ke 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kd 0.85 Table 26.6-1 Kzt 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kh 0.81 Table 26.10-1 Eq. 13.3-1 qh 15.9 psf Eq. 26.10-1 Af 44.6 ft2 Vert. Proj. Area Av 54.5 ft2 Horiz. Proj. Area Eq. 13.3-3 GCr,h 1.90 Sec. 29.4.1 Eq. 13.3-2 GCr,v 1.50 Sec. 29.4.1 Sec. 13.3.1.2 Fh 0 lb Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 26.10-1 Fv 0 lb Eq. 29.4-3 Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 29.4-3 Version: 02/18/2021 Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation Swtichgear Anchorage Motor control centers, panel boards, switch gear, instrumentation cabinets, and other components constructed of sheet metal framingComponent Base Material Component Type Mechanical and Electrical Components Slab on Grade Equip Description (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) 2300128.04 Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. Windward Engineers & Consultants Switchgear Anchorage Santa Ana, CA 8/21/2025 0.4 1 2 ℎ , 0.3 , 1.6 0.00256 !"#$ %&'(,)*+ ,%&'(,,)*( , -0.2 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 S-4 project by location date client job no. Anchorage Locations Anchorage Group Properties # X Y dx 2 dy 2 d2 x 38.0 in x-dist. of C.R.from Origin 1 5.00 5.00 1089 2116 3205 y 51.0 in y-dist. of C.R.from Origin 2 5.00 97.00 1089 2116 3205 ex 0.5 in x-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 3 36.00 5.00 4 2116 2120 ey 0.0 in y-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 4 36.00 97.00 4 2116 2120 Ix 12696 in2 Σ dxi 2 5 73.00 5.00 1225 2116 3341 Iy 4636 in2 Σ dyi 2 6 73.00 97.00 1225 2116 3341 Ipolar 17332 in2 Ipolar = Ix + Iy Base Connection Eccentricity Factor EF 1.0 Individual Bolts in Tension (+ indicates tension/uplift) Individual Bolts in Shear θmax Sx Sy Tdirect T θmax Vtorsion Vdirect V degrees in3 in3 lbs lbs degrees lbs lbs lbs 1 27 -946 -3687 1838 2795 1 89.8 22 2283 2305 2 333 -946 -3687 1838 2795 2 89.8 22 2283 2305 3 83 -2069 -32 1838 263 3 89.8 18 2283 2301 4 277 -2069 -32 1838 263 4 89.8 18 2283 2301 5 154 -900 -3875 1838 2937 5 89.9 23 2283 2305 6 206 -900 -3875 1838 2937 6 89.9 23 2283 2305 Summary: Tension: The maximum bolt in Tension: 0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 2937 lb/bolt TmaxEF 2937 lb/bolt Vmax 2292 lb/bolt Shear: The maximum bolt in Shear:0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 2937 lb/bolt TmaxEF 2937 lb/bolt Vmax 2305 lb/bolt Version: 02/18/2021 8/21/2025 Through equipment or no prying action This Connection is Through: Swtichgear Anchorage Windward Engineers & Consultants Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) 2300128.04 # # Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. Santa Ana, CA Note: the Eccentricity Factor (EF) arises from an indirect connection at the base. 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 . /01 /10 1 2 0.9 2 Ω5, 67 / Ω8sin < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)=1 /1 Ω8 cos < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)= / %=sin< =1 cos <) # /0 5A( 67 S-5 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 1 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 1 8/21/2025 Specifier's comments: 1 Input data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS 3/4 (3 3/4) hnom2 Item number: 2210311 KB-TZ2 3/4x5 1/2 Specification text: Hilti Æ 3/4 in Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS with 4.5 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-4266 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII, Effective embedment depth: hef,act = 3.750 in., hnom = 4.500 in. Material: Carbon Steel Evaluation Service Report: ESR-4266 Issued I Valid: 10/1/2024 | 12/1/2025 Proof: Design Method ACI 318-19 / Mech Shear edge breakout verification: Row closest to edge (Case 3 only from ACI 318-19 Fig. R.17.7.2.1b) Stand-off installation: Profile: Base material: cracked concrete, 3000, fc' = 3,000 psi; h = 18.000 in. Installation: Hammer drilled hole, Installation condition: Dry Reinforcement: tension: not present, shear: not present; no supplemental splitting reinforcement present edge reinforcement: none or < No. 4 bar Seismic loads (cat. C, D, E, or F) Tension load: yes (17.10.5.3 (d)) Shear load: yes (17.10.6.3 (c)) S-6 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 2 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 2 8/21/2025 Geometry [in.] & Loading [lb, in.lb] S-7 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 3 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 3 8/21/2025 1.1 Design results Case Description Forces [lb] / Moments [in.lb]Seismic Max. Util. Anchor [%] 1 Combination 1 N = 2,937; Vx = -2,305; Vy = 0; Mx = 0; My = 0; Mz = 0; yes 74 2 Load case/Resulting anchor forces Anchor reactions [lb] Tension force: (+Tension, -Compression) Anchor Tension force Shear force Shear force x Shear force y 1 2,937 2,305 -2,305 0 3 Tension load Load Nua [lb]Capacity f Nn [lb]Utilization bN = Nua/f Nn Status Steel Strength*2,937 19,009 16 OK Pullout Strength*N/A N/A N/A N/A Concrete Breakout Failure**2,937 4,072 73 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (anchors in tension) S-8 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 4 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 4 8/21/2025 3.1 Steel Strength Nsa = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-4266 f Nsa ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,N [in.2]futa [psi] 0.24 105,904 Calculations Nsa [lb] 25,345 Results Nsa [lb]f steel f Nsa [lb]Nua [lb] 25,345 0.750 19,009 2,937 3.2 Concrete Breakout Failure Ncb = (ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1a) f Ncb ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 3.750 6.000 1.000 10.000 21 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 126.56 126.56 1.000 1.000 8,353 Results Ncb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Ncb [lb]Nua [lb] 8,353 0.650 0.750 1.000 4,072 2,937 S-9 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 5 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 5 8/21/2025 4 Shear load Load Vua [lb]Capacity f Vn [lb]Utilization bV = Vua/f Vn Status Steel Strength*2,305 8,977 26 OK Steel failure (with lever arm)*N/A N/A N/A N/A Pryout Strength**2,305 11,694 20 OK Concrete edge failure in direction x-**2,305 7,110 33 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (relevant anchors) When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 4.1 Steel Strength Vsa,eq = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-4266 f Vsteel ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,V [in.2]futa [psi]aV,seis 0.24 105,904 1.000 Calculations Vsa,eq [lb] 13,811 Results Vsa,eq [lb]f steel f Vsa,eq [lb]Vua [lb] 13,811 0.650 8,977 2,305 S-10 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 6 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 6 8/21/2025 4.2 Pryout Strength Vcp = kcp [(ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ] ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.3.1a) f Vcp ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables kcp hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N 2 3.750 6.000 1.000 cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 10.000 21 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 126.56 126.56 1.000 1.000 8,353 Results Vcp [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcp [lb]Vua [lb] 16,705 0.700 1.000 1.000 11,694 2,305 S-11 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 7 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 7 8/21/2025 4.3 Concrete edge failure in direction x- Vcb = (AVc AVc0)y ed,V y c,V y h,V y parallel,V Vb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1a) f Vcb ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 AVc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.7.2.1, Fig. R 17.7.2.1(b)* AVc0 = 4.5 c2 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1.3) y ed,V = 0.7 + 0.3(ca2 1.5ca1)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.4.1b) y h,V = √1.5ca1 ha ³ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.6.1) Vb = (7 (le da)0.2 √da)l a √f' c c1.5 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.2.1a) Variables ca1 [in.]ca2 [in.]y c,V ha [in.]le [in.] 12.000 6.000 1.000 18.000 3.750 l a da [in.]f' c [psi]y parallel,V 1.000 0.750 3,000 1.000 Calculations AVc [in.2]AVc0 [in.2]y ed,V y h,V Vb [lb] 432.00 648.00 0.800 1.000 19,044 Results Vcb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcb [lb]Vua [lb] 10,157 0.700 1.000 1.000 7,110 2,305 *Anchor row defined by: Anchor 1; Case 3 controls When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 5 Combined tension and shear loads, per ACI 318-19 section 17.8 bN bV z Utilization bN,V [%]Status 0.721 0.324 5/3 74 OK bNV = bz N + bz V <= 1 S-12 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 8 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 8 8/21/2025 6 Warnings • The anchor design methods in PROFIS Engineering require rigid anchor plates per current regulations (AS 5216:2021, ETAG 001/Annex C, EOTA TR029 etc.). This means load re-distribution on the anchors due to elastic deformations of the anchor plate are not considered - the anchor plate is assumed to be sufficiently stiff, in order not to be deformed when subjected to the design loading. PROFIS Engineering calculates the minimum required anchor plate thickness with CBFEM to limit the stress of the anchor plate based on the assumptions explained above. The proof if the rigid anchor plate assumption is valid is not carried out by PROFIS Engineering. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility! • The equations presented in this report are based on imperial units. When inputs are displayed in metric units, the user should be aware that the equations remain in their imperial format. • Condition A applies where the potential concrete failure surfaces are crossed by supplementary reinforcement proportioned to tie the potential concrete failure prism into the structural member. Condition B applies where such supplementary reinforcement is not provided, or where pullout or pryout strength governs. • Refer to the manufacturer's product literature for cleaning and installation instructions. • For additional information about ACI 318 strength design provisions, please go to https://viewer.joomag.com/profis-design-guide-us-en-summer-2021/0841849001625154758?short&/ • "An anchor design approach for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F is given in ACI 318-19, Chapter 17, Section 17.10.5.3 (a) that requires the governing design strength of an anchor or group of anchors be limited by ductile steel failure. If this is NOT the case, the connection design (tension) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.5.3 (b), Section 17.10.5.3 (c), or Section 17.10.5.3 (d). The connection design (shear) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.6.3 (a), Section 17.10.6.3 (b), or Section 17.10.6.3 (c)." • Section 17.10.5.3 (b) / Section 17.10.6.3 (a) require the attachment the anchors are connecting to the structure be designed to undergo ductile yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor forces no greater than the controlling design strength. Section 17.10.5.3 (c) / Section 17.10.6.3 (b) waive the ductility requirements and require the anchors to be designed for the maximum tension / shear that can be transmitted to the anchors by a non-yielding attachment. Section 17.10.5.3 (d) / Section 17.10.6.3 (c) waive the ductility requirements and require the design strength of the anchors to equal or exceed the maximum tension / shear obtained from design load combinations that include E, with E increased by w0. • Hilti post-installed anchors shall be installed in accordance with the Hilti Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). Reference ACI 318-19, Section 26.7. Fastening meets the design criteria! S-13 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 9 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 9 8/21/2025 7 Installation data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS 3/4 (3 3/4) hnom2 Profile: - Item number: 2210311 KB-TZ2 3/4x5 1/2 Hole diameter in the fixture: - Maximum installation torque: 1,324 in.lb Plate thickness (input): - Hole diameter in the base material: 0.750 in. Hole depth in the base material: 4.750 in. Drilling method: Hammer drilled Minimum thickness of the base material: 6.000 in. Cleaning: Manual cleaning of the drilled hole according to instructions for use is required. Hilti Æ 3/4 in Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS with 4.5 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-4266 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII 7.1 Recommended accessories Drilling Cleaning Setting • Suitable Rotary Hammer • Properly sized drill bit • Manual blow-out pump • Torque controlled cordless impact tool • Torque wrench • Hammer Coordinates Anchor in. Anchor x y c-x c+x c-y c+y 1 0.000 0.000 12.000 -6.000 - S-14 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.19 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 10 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 SWITCHBOARD ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 10 8/21/2025 8 Remarks; Your Cooperation Duties • Any and all information and data contained in the Software concern solely the use of Hilti products and are based on the principles, formulas and security regulations in accordance with Hilti's technical directions and operating, mounting and assembly instructions, etc., that must be strictly complied with by the user. All figures contained therein are average figures, and therefore use-specific tests are to be conducted prior to using the relevant Hilti product. The results of the calculations carried out by means of the Software are based essentially on the data you put in. Therefore, you bear the sole responsibility for the absence of errors, the completeness and the relevance of the data to be put in by you. Moreover, you bear sole responsibility for having the results of the calculation checked and cleared by an expert, particularly with regard to compliance with applicable norms and permits, prior to using them for your specific facility. The Software serves only as an aid to interpret norms and permits without any guarantee as to the absence of errors, the correctness and the relevance of the results or suitability for a specific application. • You must take all necessary and reasonable steps to prevent or limit damage caused by the Software. In particular, you must arrange for the regular backup of programs and data and, if applicable, carry out the updates of the Software offered by Hilti on a regular basis. If you do not use the AutoUpdate function of the Software, you must ensure that you are using the current and thus up-to-date version of the Software in each case by carrying out manual updates via the Hilti Website. Hilti will not be liable for consequences, such as the recovery of lost or damaged data or programs, arising from a culpable breach of duty by you. S-15 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Switchboard Project: Encompass Rehab Hospital Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Code References Calculations per ACI 318-19, IBC 2021 Load Combinations Used : ASCE 7-22 / IBC 2024 (L<=100psf) General Information Material Properties Soil Design Values 1.50 Analysis Settings 250.0 ksi No ksfAllowable Soil Bearing = = 3.0 60.0 3,122.02 150.0 =0.30Flexure=0.90 Shear = ValuesM 0.00180 Soil Passive Resistance (for Sliding) 1.0 = Increases based on footing plan dimension Add Pedestal Wt for Soil Pressure No: Use Pedestal wt for stability, mom & shear No: Allowable pressure increase per foot of depth =ksfwhen max. length or width is greater than =ft : = Add Ftg Wt for Soil Pressure Yes Yes:Use ftg wt for stability, moments & shears when footing base is below ft pcf Increase Bearing By Footing Weight =pcf Min. Overturning Safety Factor = : 1 Increases based on footing Depth0.750 = Soil/Concrete Friction Coeff. Ec : Concrete Elastic Modulus = =Footing base depth below soil surface ft =Allow press. increase per foot of depth ksf = = Concrete Density = Min Allow % Temp Reinf. ksif'c : Concrete 28 day strength fy : Rebar Yield ksi Min Steel % Bending Reinf. Soil Density =110.0 pcf # Dimensions Width parallel to X-X Axis 8.50 ft Length parallel to Z-Z Axis = 6.420 ft =Pedestal dimensions... px : parallel to X-X Axis in pz : parallel to Z-Z Axis in Height = = in Footing Thickness = 27.0 in= Rebar Centerline to Edge of Concrete... =inat Bottom of footing 3.0 Reinforcing # Bars parallel to X-X Axis Reinforcing Bar Size = 7 Number of Bars = 8 Bars parallel to Z-Z Axis Reinforcing Bar Size =7 Number of Bars =9 Bandwidth Distribution Check (ACI 15.4.4.2) Direction Requiring Closer Separation Bars along Z-Z Axis # Bars required within zone 86.1 % # Bars required on each side of zone 13.9 % Applied Loads 22.40 D Lr ksf L S P : Column Load OB : Overburden = k W E M-zz V-x = =k V-z k M-xx = k-ft= k-ft H = S-16 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Switchboard Project: Encompass Rehab Hospital Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Governing Load CombinationMin. Ratio Item Applied Capacity PASS 0.4987 Soil Bearing 0.7480 ksf 1.50 ksf D Only about Z-Z axis PASS n/a Overturning - X-X 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Overturning - Z-Z 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Uplift 0.0 k 0.0 k No Uplift PASS 0.06630 Z Flexure (+X)5.190 k-ft/ft 78.281 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.06630 Z Flexure (-X)5.190 k-ft/ft 78.281 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.04430 X Flexure (+Z)2.961 k-ft/ft 66.831 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.04430 X Flexure (-Z)2.961 k-ft/ft 66.831 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.09764 1-way Shear (+X)4.410 psi 45.167 psi +1.40D PASS 0.09764 1-way Shear (-X)4.410 psi 45.167 psi +1.40D PASS 0.05690 1-way Shear (+Z)2.434 psi 42.780 psi +1.40D PASS 0.05690 1-way Shear (-Z)2.434 psi 42.780 psi +1.40D PASS 0.07647 2-way Punching 12.566 psi 164.317 psi +1.40D Detailed Results Rotation Axis &ZeccXecc Actual Soil Bearing Stress @ Location Actual / Allow Soil Bearing (in)Gross Allowable Bottom, -Z Top, +Z Left, -X Right, +X RatioLoad Combination... X-X, D Only 1.50 n/a0.7480 0.7480 n/a 0.4990.0n/a X-X, +0.60D 1.50 n/a0.4488 0.4488 n/a 0.2990.0n/a Z-Z, D Only 1.50 0.7480n/a n/a 0.7480 0.499n/a0.0 Z-Z, +0.60D 1.50 0.4488n/a n/a 0.4488 0.299n/a0.0 Rotation Axis & Overturning Stability Load Combination...StatusOverturning Moment Resisting Moment Stability Ratio Footing Has NO Overturning Flexure Axis & Load Combination in^2 in^2 in^2 k-ft As Req'd Footing Flexure Tension k-ft Actual As StatusMuSide Surface Gvrn. As Phi*Mn X-X, +1.40D 2.961 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK X-X, +1.40D 2.961 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK X-X, +1.20D 2.538 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK X-X, +1.20D 2.538 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK X-X, +0.90D 1.903 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK X-X, +0.90D 1.903 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6353 66.831 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 5.190 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 5.190 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 4.449 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 4.449 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 3.336 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 3.336 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.7477 78.281 OK One Way Shear X Vu @ +XLoad Combination...Vu @ -X Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 4.41 4.41 4.41 45.17 0.10psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 3.78 3.78 3.78 45.17 0.08psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 2.84 2.84 2.84 45.17 0.06psipsipsipsi OK One Way Shear Z Load Combination...Vu @ -Z Vu @ +Z Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 2.43 2.43 2.43 42.78 0.06psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 2.09 2.09 2.09 42.78 0.05psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 1.57 1.57 1.57 42.78 0.04psipsipsipsi OK S-17 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Switchboard Project: Encompass Rehab Hospital Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Vu / Phi*Vn Two-Way "Punching" Shear All units k StatusVuPhi*VnLoad Combination... +1.40D 12.57 164.32 0.07647 OKpsipsi +1.20D 10.77 164.32 0.06555 OKpsipsi +0.90D 8.08 164.32 0.04916 OKpsipsi S-18 project by location date client job no. Component Description Unit & Anchorage Properties W 11100 lb Equipment Weight l 48.0 in Length of Unit w 150.0 in Width of Unit H 108.0 in Height of Unit h 72.0 in Height to C.G. above Base z 0.0 ft Component Height in Structure hr 1.0 ft Mean Roof Height of Structure CGx 75.0 in Center of Mass, width-direction Cgy 24.0 in Center of Mass, length-direction n 8 Anchorage Locations m 1 anchors (at each anchorage location) Seismic Accelerations SDS 1.019 %g Ip 1.00 13.1.3 ap 1 Table 13.6-1 Rp 1 1/2 Table 13.6-1 Ω0 2 Table 13.6-1 Fp,calc 0.27 Wp Eq. 13.3-1 Fp,min 0.31 Wp Controls Eq. 13.3-3 Fp,max 1.63 Wp Eq. 13.3-2 Fv 0.20 Wp 13.3.1.2 Ω0Fp 6,787 lb Ω0Fv 4,524 lb Wind Forces Req'd?No V 95 mph Fig 26.5-1a-c Exp. Cat. B Sec. 26.7.3 h 50 ft Mean Roof Height B 100 ft Width of Roof L 200 ft Length of Roof Elev 0 ft Above Sea Level Ke 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kd 0.85 Table 26.6-1 Kzt 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kh 0.81 Table 26.10-1 Eq. 13.3-1 qh 15.9 psf Eq. 26.10-1 Af 112.5 ft2 Vert. Proj. Area Av 50.0 ft2 Horiz. Proj. Area Eq. 13.3-3 GCr,h 1.90 Sec. 29.4.1 Eq. 13.3-2 GCr,v 1.50 Sec. 29.4.1 Sec. 13.3.1.2 Fh 0 lb Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 26.10-1 Fv 0 lb Eq. 29.4-3 Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 29.4-3 Version: 02/18/2021 Base Material Slab on Grade Component Type Mechanical and Electrical Components Component Other mechanical or electircal components Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) Equip Description UMC Anchorage Windward Engineers & Consultants 2300128.04 UMC Anchorage Santa Ana, CA 4/15/2025 Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. 0.4 1 2 ℎ , 0.3 , 1.6 0.00256 !"#$ %&'(,)*+ ,%&'(,,)*( , -0.2 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 S-19 project by location date client job no. Anchorage Locations Anchorage Group Properties # X Y dx 2 dy 2 d2 x 79.5 in x-dist. of C.R.from Origin 1 0.00 0.00 6320 576 6896 y 24.0 in y-dist. of C.R.from Origin 2 42.00 0.00 1406 576 1982 ex 4.5 in x-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 3 126.00 0.00 2162 576 2738 ey 0.0 in y-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 4 150.00 0.00 4970 576 5546 Ix 4608 in2 Σ dxi 2 5 0.00 48.00 6320 576 6896 Iy 29718 in2 Σ dyi 2 6 42.00 48.00 1406 576 1982 Ipolar 34326 in2 Ipolar = Ix + Iy 7 126.00 48.00 2162 576 2738 8 150.00 48.00 4970 576 5546 Base Connection Eccentricity Factor EF 1.0 Individual Bolts in Tension (+ indicates tension/uplift) Individual Bolts in Shear θmax Sx Sy Tdirect T θmax Vtorsion Vdirect V degrees in3 in3 lbs lbs degrees lbs lbs lbs 1 63 -2264 -532 683 2112 1 90.0 74 848 922 2 76 -2474 -114 683 1904 2 90.0 40 848 888 3 107 -2438 -258 683 2013 3 90.0 47 848 895 4 114 -2316 -539 683 2172 4 90.0 66 848 915 5 297 -2264 -532 683 2112 5 90.0 74 848 922 6 284 -2474 -114 683 1904 6 90.0 40 848 888 7 253 -2438 -258 683 2013 7 90.0 47 848 895 8 245 -2316 -539 683 2172 8 90.0 66 848 915 Summary: Tension: The maximum bolt in Tension: 0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 2172 lb/bolt TmaxEF 2172 lb/bolt Vmax 909 lb/bolt Shear: The maximum bolt in Shear:0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 2112 lb/bolt TmaxEF 2112 lb/bolt Vmax 922 lb/bolt Version: 02/18/2021 # # This Connection is Through: Through equipment or no prying action Note: the Eccentricity Factor (EF) arises from an indirect connection at the base. Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) Windward Engineers & Consultants 2300128.04 UMC Anchorage Santa Ana, CA 4/15/2025 Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 . /01 /10 1 2 0.9 2 Ω5 , 67 / Ω8sin < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)=1 /1 Ω8cos < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)= / %=sin< =1 cos <) # /0 5A( 67 S-20 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 1 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 1 4/15/2025 Specifier's comments: 1 Input data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS 3/4 (3 1/4) hnom1 Item number: 2210310 KB-TZ2 3/4x4 3/4 Specification text: Hilti Æ 3/4 in Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS with 4 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-4266 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII, Effective embedment depth: hef,act = 3.250 in., hnom = 4.000 in. Material: Carbon Steel Evaluation Service Report: ESR-4266 Issued I Valid: 10/1/2024 | 12/1/2025 Proof: Design Method ACI 318-19 / Mech Shear edge breakout verification: Row closest to edge (Case 3 only from ACI 318-19 Fig. R.17.7.2.1b) Stand-off installation: Profile: Base material: cracked concrete, 3000, fc' = 3,000 psi; h = 18.000 in. Installation: Hammer drilled hole, Installation condition: Dry Reinforcement: tension: not present, shear: not present; no supplemental splitting reinforcement present edge reinforcement: none or < No. 4 bar Seismic loads (cat. C, D, E, or F) Tension load: yes (17.10.5.3 (d)) Shear load: yes (17.10.6.3 (c)) S-21 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 2 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 2 4/15/2025 Geometry [in.] & Loading [lb, in.lb] S-22 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 3 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 3 4/15/2025 1.1 Design results Case Description Forces [lb] / Moments [in.lb]Seismic Max. Util. Anchor [%] 1 Combination 1 N = 2,112; Vx = -922; Vy = 0; Mx = 0; My = 0; Mz = 0; yes 65 2 Load case/Resulting anchor forces Anchor reactions [lb] Tension force: (+Tension, -Compression) Anchor Tension force Shear force Shear force x Shear force y 1 2,112 922 -922 0 3 Tension load Load Nua [lb]Capacity f Nn [lb]Utilization bN = Nua/f Nn Status Steel Strength*2,112 19,009 12 OK Pullout Strength*N/A N/A N/A N/A Concrete Breakout Failure**2,112 3,285 65 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (anchors in tension) S-23 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 4 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 4 4/15/2025 3.1 Steel Strength Nsa = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-4266 f Nsa ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,N [in.2]futa [psi] 0.24 105,904 Calculations Nsa [lb] 25,345 Results Nsa [lb]f steel f nonductile f Nsa [lb]Nua [lb] 25,345 0.750 1.000 19,009 2,112 3.2 Concrete Breakout Failure Ncb = (ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1a) f Ncb ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 3.250 6.000 1.000 12.000 21 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 95.06 95.06 1.000 1.000 6,739 Results Ncb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Ncb [lb]Nua [lb] 6,739 0.650 0.750 1.000 3,285 2,112 S-24 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 5 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 5 4/15/2025 4 Shear load Load Vua [lb]Capacity f Vn [lb]Utilization bV = Vua/f Vn Status Steel Strength*922 8,977 11 OK Steel failure (with lever arm)*N/A N/A N/A N/A Pryout Strength**922 9,435 10 OK Concrete edge failure in direction x-**922 3,435 27 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (relevant anchors) When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 4.1 Steel Strength Vsa,eq = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-4266 f Vsteel ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,V [in.2]futa [psi]aV,seis 0.24 105,904 1.000 Calculations Vsa,eq [lb] 13,811 Results Vsa,eq [lb]f steel f nonductile f Vsa,eq [lb]Vua [lb] 13,811 0.650 1.000 8,977 922 S-25 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 6 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 6 4/15/2025 4.2 Pryout Strength Vcp = kcp [(ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ] ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.3.1a) f Vcp ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables kcp hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N 2 3.250 6.000 1.000 cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 12.000 21 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 95.06 95.06 1.000 1.000 6,739 Results Vcp [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcp [lb]Vua [lb] 13,478 0.700 1.000 1.000 9,435 922 S-26 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 7 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 7 4/15/2025 4.3 Concrete edge failure in direction x- Vcb = (AVc AVc0)y ed,V y c,V y h,V y parallel,V Vb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1a) f Vcb ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 AVc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.7.2.1, Fig. R 17.7.2.1(b)* AVc0 = 4.5 c2 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1.3) y ed,V = 0.7 + 0.3(ca2 1.5ca1)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.4.1b) y h,V = √1.5ca1 ha ³ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.6.1) Vb = (7 (le da)0.2 √da)l a √f' c c1.5 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.2.1a) Variables ca1 [in.]ca2 [in.]y c,V ha [in.]le [in.] 6.000 6.000 1.000 18.000 3.250 l a da [in.]f' c [psi]y parallel,V 1.000 0.750 3,000 1.000 Calculations AVc [in.2]AVc0 [in.2]y ed,V y h,V Vb [lb] 135.00 162.00 0.900 1.000 6,543 Results Vcb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcb [lb]Vua [lb] 4,907 0.700 1.000 1.000 3,435 922 *Anchor row defined by: Anchor 1; Case 3 controls When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 5 Combined tension and shear loads, per ACI 318-19 section 17.8 bN bV z Utilization bN,V [%]Status 0.643 0.268 5/3 60 OK bNV = bz N + bz V <= 1 S-27 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 8 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 8 4/15/2025 6 Warnings • The anchor design methods in PROFIS Engineering require rigid anchor plates per current regulations (AS 5216:2021, ETAG 001/Annex C, EOTA TR029 etc.). This means load re-distribution on the anchors due to elastic deformations of the anchor plate are not considered - the anchor plate is assumed to be sufficiently stiff, in order not to be deformed when subjected to the design loading. PROFIS Engineering calculates the minimum required anchor plate thickness with CBFEM to limit the stress of the anchor plate based on the assumptions explained above. The proof if the rigid anchor plate assumption is valid is not carried out by PROFIS Engineering. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility! • The equations presented in this report are based on imperial units. When inputs are displayed in metric units, the user should be aware that the equations remain in their imperial format. • Condition A applies where the potential concrete failure surfaces are crossed by supplementary reinforcement proportioned to tie the potential concrete failure prism into the structural member. Condition B applies where such supplementary reinforcement is not provided, or where pullout or pryout strength governs. • Refer to the manufacturer's product literature for cleaning and installation instructions. • For additional information about ACI 318 strength design provisions, please go to https://viewer.joomag.com/profis-design-guide-us-en-summer-2021/0841849001625154758?short&/ • "An anchor design approach for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F is given in ACI 318-19, Chapter 17, Section 17.10.5.3 (a) that requires the governing design strength of an anchor or group of anchors be limited by ductile steel failure. If this is NOT the case, the connection design (tension) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.5.3 (b), Section 17.10.5.3 (c), or Section 17.10.5.3 (d). The connection design (shear) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.6.3 (a), Section 17.10.6.3 (b), or Section 17.10.6.3 (c)." • Section 17.10.5.3 (b) / Section 17.10.6.3 (a) require the attachment the anchors are connecting to the structure be designed to undergo ductile yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor forces no greater than the controlling design strength. Section 17.10.5.3 (c) / Section 17.10.6.3 (b) waive the ductility requirements and require the anchors to be designed for the maximum tension / shear that can be transmitted to the anchors by a non-yielding attachment. Section 17.10.5.3 (d) / Section 17.10.6.3 (c) waive the ductility requirements and require the design strength of the anchors to equal or exceed the maximum tension / shear obtained from design load combinations that include E, with E increased by w0. • Hilti post-installed anchors shall be installed in accordance with the Hilti Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). Reference ACI 318-19, Section 26.7. Fastening meets the design criteria! S-28 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 9 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 9 4/15/2025 7 Installation data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS 3/4 (3 1/4) hnom1 Profile: - Item number: 2210310 KB-TZ2 3/4x4 3/4 Hole diameter in the fixture: - Maximum installation torque: 1,324 in.lb Plate thickness (input): - Hole diameter in the base material: 0.750 in. Hole depth in the base material: 4.250 in. Drilling method: Hammer drilled Minimum thickness of the base material: 5.500 in. Cleaning: Manual cleaning of the drilled hole according to instructions for use is required. Hilti Æ 3/4 in Kwik Bolt TZ2 - CS with 4 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-4266 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII 7.1 Recommended accessories Drilling Cleaning Setting • Suitable Rotary Hammer • Properly sized drill bit • Manual blow-out pump • Torque controlled cordless impact tool • Torque wrench • Hammer Coordinates Anchor in. Anchor x y c-x c+x c-y c+y 1 0.000 0.000 6.000 -6.000 - S-29 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 10 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 UMC ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 10 4/15/2025 8 Remarks; Your Cooperation Duties • Any and all information and data contained in the Software concern solely the use of Hilti products and are based on the principles, formulas and security regulations in accordance with Hilti's technical directions and operating, mounting and assembly instructions, etc., that must be strictly complied with by the user. All figures contained therein are average figures, and therefore use-specific tests are to be conducted prior to using the relevant Hilti product. The results of the calculations carried out by means of the Software are based essentially on the data you put in. Therefore, you bear the sole responsibility for the absence of errors, the completeness and the relevance of the data to be put in by you. Moreover, you bear sole responsibility for having the results of the calculation checked and cleared by an expert, particularly with regard to compliance with applicable norms and permits, prior to using them for your specific facility. The Software serves only as an aid to interpret norms and permits without any guarantee as to the absence of errors, the correctness and the relevance of the results or suitability for a specific application. • You must take all necessary and reasonable steps to prevent or limit damage caused by the Software. In particular, you must arrange for the regular backup of programs and data and, if applicable, carry out the updates of the Software offered by Hilti on a regular basis. If you do not use the AutoUpdate function of the Software, you must ensure that you are using the current and thus up-to-date version of the Software in each case by carrying out manual updates via the Hilti Website. Hilti will not be liable for consequences, such as the recovery of lost or damaged data or programs, arising from a culpable breach of duty by you. S-30 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - UMC Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Code References Calculations per ACI 318-19, IBC 2021 Load Combinations Used : ASCE 7-22 / IBC 2024 (L<=100psf) General Information Material Properties Soil Design Values 1.50 Analysis Settings 250.0 ksi No ksfAllowable Soil Bearing = = 3.0 60.0 3,122.02 150.0 =0.30Flexure=0.90 Shear = ValuesM 0.00180 Soil Passive Resistance (for Sliding) 1.0 = Increases based on footing plan dimension Add Pedestal Wt for Soil Pressure No: Use Pedestal wt for stability, mom & shear No: Allowable pressure increase per foot of depth =ksfwhen max. length or width is greater than =ft : = Add Ftg Wt for Soil Pressure Yes Yes:Use ftg wt for stability, moments & shears when footing base is below ft pcf Increase Bearing By Footing Weight =pcf Min. Overturning Safety Factor = : 1 Increases based on footing Depth0.750 = Soil/Concrete Friction Coeff. Ec : Concrete Elastic Modulus = =Footing base depth below soil surface ft =Allow press. increase per foot of depth ksf = = Concrete Density = Min Allow % Temp Reinf. ksif'c : Concrete 28 day strength fy : Rebar Yield ksi Min Steel % Bending Reinf. Soil Density =110.0 pcf # Dimensions Width parallel to X-X Axis 12.50 ft Length parallel to Z-Z Axis = 7.830 ft =Pedestal dimensions... px : parallel to X-X Axis in pz : parallel to Z-Z Axis in Height = = in Footing Thickness = 27.0 in= Rebar Centerline to Edge of Concrete... =inat Bottom of footing 3.0 Reinforcing # Bars parallel to X-X Axis Reinforcing Bar Size = 7 Number of Bars = 8.0 Bars parallel to Z-Z Axis Reinforcing Bar Size =7 Number of Bars =13.0 Bandwidth Distribution Check (ACI 15.4.4.2) Direction Requiring Closer Separation Bars along Z-Z Axis # Bars required within zone 77.0 % # Bars required on each side of zone 23.0 % Applied Loads 11.10 D Lr ksf L S P : Column Load OB : Overburden = k W E M-zz V-x = =k V-z k M-xx = k-ft= k-ft H = S-31 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - UMC Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Governing Load CombinationMin. Ratio Item Applied Capacity PASS 0.3006 Soil Bearing 0.4509 ksf 1.50 ksf D Only about Z-Z axis PASS n/a Overturning - X-X 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Overturning - Z-Z 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Uplift 0.0 k 0.0 k No Uplift PASS 0.04804 Z Flexure (+X)3.101 k-ft/ft 64.549 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.04804 Z Flexure (-X)3.101 k-ft/ft 64.549 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.01853 X Flexure (+Z)1.217 k-ft/ft 65.674 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.01853 X Flexure (-Z)1.217 k-ft/ft 65.674 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.05542 1-way Shear (+X)2.343 psi 42.274 psi +1.40D PASS 0.05542 1-way Shear (-X)2.343 psi 42.274 psi +1.40D PASS 0.02436 1-way Shear (+Z)1.036 psi 42.525 psi +1.40D PASS 0.02436 1-way Shear (-Z)1.036 psi 42.525 psi +1.40D PASS 0.03934 2-way Punching 6.464 psi 164.317 psi +1.40D Detailed Results Rotation Axis &ZeccXecc Actual Soil Bearing Stress @ Location Actual / Allow Soil Bearing (in)Gross Allowable Bottom, -Z Top, +Z Left, -X Right, +X RatioLoad Combination... X-X, D Only 1.50 n/a0.4509 0.4509 n/a 0.3010.0n/a X-X, +0.60D 1.50 n/a0.2705 0.2705 n/a 0.1800.0n/a Z-Z, D Only 1.50 0.4509n/a n/a 0.4509 0.301n/a0.0 Z-Z, +0.60D 1.50 0.2705n/a n/a 0.2705 0.180n/a0.0 Rotation Axis & Overturning Stability Load Combination...StatusOverturning Moment Resisting Moment Stability Ratio Footing Has NO Overturning Flexure Axis & Load Combination in^2 in^2 in^2 k-ft As Req'd Footing Flexure Tension k-ft Actual As StatusMuSide Surface Gvrn. As Phi*Mn X-X, +1.40D 1.217 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK X-X, +1.40D 1.217 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK X-X, +1.20D 1.043 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK X-X, +1.20D 1.043 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK X-X, +0.90D 0.7822 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK X-X, +0.90D 0.7822 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6240 65.674 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 3.101 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 3.101 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 2.658 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 2.658 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 1.994 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 1.994 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6130 64.549 OK One Way Shear X Vu @ +XLoad Combination...Vu @ -X Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 2.34 2.34 2.34 42.27 0.06psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 2.01 2.01 2.01 42.27 0.05psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 1.51 1.51 1.51 42.27 0.04psipsipsipsi OK One Way Shear Z Load Combination...Vu @ -Z Vu @ +Z Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 1.04 1.04 1.04 42.53 0.02psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 0.89 0.89 0.89 42.53 0.02psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 0.67 0.67 0.67 42.53 0.02psipsipsipsi OK S-32 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - UMC Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Vu / Phi*Vn Two-Way "Punching" Shear All units k StatusVuPhi*VnLoad Combination... +1.40D 6.46 164.32 0.03934 OKpsipsi +1.20D 5.54 164.32 0.03372 OKpsipsi +0.90D 4.16 164.32 0.02529 OKpsipsi S-33 project by location date client job no. Component Description Unit & Anchorage Properties W 11575 lb Equipment Weight l 105.0 in Length of Unit w 90.0 in Width of Unit H 86.0 in Height of Unit h 57.3 in Height to C.G. above Base z 0.0 ft Component Height in Structure hr 1.0 ft Mean Roof Height of Structure CGx 45.0 in Center of Mass, width-direction Cgy 52.5 in Center of Mass, length-direction n 8 Anchorage Locations m 1 anchors (at each anchorage location) Seismic Accelerations SDS 1.019 %g Ip 1.00 13.1.3 ap 1 Table 13.6-1 Rp 1 1/2 Table 13.6-1 Ω0 2 Table 13.6-1 Fp,calc 0.27 Wp Eq. 13.3-1 Fp,min 0.31 Wp Controls Eq. 13.3-3 Fp,max 1.63 Wp Eq. 13.3-2 Fv 0.20 Wp 13.3.1.2 Ω0Fp 7,077 lb Ω0Fv 4,718 lb Wind Forces Req'd?No V 95 mph Fig 26.5-1a-c Exp. Cat. B Sec. 26.7.3 h 50 ft Mean Roof Height B 100 ft Width of Roof L 200 ft Length of Roof Elev 0 ft Above Sea Level Ke 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kd 0.85 Table 26.6-1 Kzt 1.00 Sec. 26.8 Kh 0.81 Table 26.10-1 Eq. 13.3-1 qh 15.9 psf Eq. 26.10-1 Af 62.7 ft2 Vert. Proj. Area Av 65.6 ft2 Horiz. Proj. Area Eq. 13.3-3 GCr,h 1.90 Sec. 29.4.1 Eq. 13.3-2 GCr,v 1.50 Sec. 29.4.1 Sec. 13.3.1.2 Fh 0 lb Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 26.10-1 Fv 0 lb Eq. 29.4-3 Eq. 29.4-2 Eq. 29.4-3 Version: 02/18/2021 Base Material Slab on Grade Component Type Mechanical and Electrical Components Component Other mechanical or electircal components Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) Equip Description Transformer Anchorage Windward Engineers & Consultants 2300128.04 Transformer Anchorage Santa Ana, CA 4/15/2025 Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. 0.4 1 2 ℎ , 0.3 , 1.6 0.00256 !"#$ %&'(,)*+ ,%&'(,,)*( , -0.2 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 S-34 project by location date client job no. Anchorage Locations Anchorage Group Properties # X Y dx 2 dy 2 d2 x 45.0 in x-dist. of C.R.from Origin 1 0.00 0.00 2025 2756 4781 y 52.5 in y-dist. of C.R.from Origin 2 45.00 0.00 0 2756 2756 ex 0.0 in x-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 3 90.00 0.00 2025 2756 4781 ey 0.0 in y-eccen. of C.G.from C.R. 4 0.00 52.50 2025 0 2025 Ix 16538 in2 Σ dxi 2 5 90.00 52.50 2025 0 2025 Iy 12150 in2 Σ dyi 2 6 0.00 105.00 2025 2756 4781 Ipolar 28688 in2 Ipolar = Ix + Iy 7 45.00 105.00 0 2756 2756 8 90.00 105.00 2025 2756 4781 Base Connection Eccentricity Factor EF 1.0 Individual Bolts in Tension (+ indicates tension/uplift) Individual Bolts in Shear θmax Sx Sy Tdirect T θmax Vtorsion Vdirect V degrees in3 in3 lbs lbs degrees lbs lbs lbs 1 41 -838 -1141 712 1267 1 0.0 0 885 885 2 90 -1288 0 712 576 2 0.0 0 885 885 3 139 -838 -1141 712 1267 3 0.0 0 885 885 4 0 0 -1503 712 790 4 0.0 0 885 885 5 180 0 -1503 712 790 5 0.0 0 885 885 6 319 -838 -1141 712 1267 6 0.0 0 885 885 7 270 -1288 0 712 576 7 0.0 0 885 885 8 221 -838 -1141 712 1267 8 0.0 0 885 885 Summary: Tension: The maximum bolt in Tension: 0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 1267 lb/bolt TmaxEF 1267 lb/bolt Vmax 885 lb/bolt Shear: The maximum bolt in Shear:0.6962D - Ω｡E Tmax 1267 lb/bolt TmaxEF 1267 lb/bolt Vmax 885 lb/bolt Version: 02/18/2021 # # This Connection is Through: Through equipment or no prying action Note: the Eccentricity Factor (EF) arises from an indirect connection at the base. Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Calculation (ASCE 7-16 - 13.2 thru 13.6) Windward Engineers & Consultants 2300128.04 Transformer Anchorage Santa Ana, CA 4/15/2025 Amazon DLX8 NM sheet no. 18400 Von Karman Ave., Suite 600 Irvine, CA 92612 (949) 252-1022 Fax (949) 252-8082 . /01 /10 1 2 0.9 2 Ω5 , 67 / Ω8sin < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)=1 /1 Ω8cos < ℎ %0.9 2 Ω8,)= / %=sin< =1 cos <) # /0 5A( 67 S-35 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 1 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 1 4/15/2025 Specifier's comments: 1 Input data Anchor type and diameter: HIT-RE 500 V3 + HAS-V-36 (ASTM F1554 Gr.36) 5/8 Item number: 2198026 HAS-V-36 5/8"x10" (element) / 2123401 HIT-RE 500 V3 (adhesive) Specification text: Hilti Æ 5/8 in HIT-RE 500 V3 + HAS-V-36 (ASTM F1554 Gr.36) with 9 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-3814 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII, Effective embedment depth: hef,act = 9.000 in. (hef,limit = - in.) Material: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 Evaluation Service Report: ESR-3814 Issued I Valid: 3/1/2023 | 1/1/2025 Proof: Design Method ACI 318-19 / Chem Shear edge breakout verification: Row closest to edge (Case 3 only from ACI 318-19 Fig. R.17.7.2.1b) Stand-off installation: Profile: Base material: cracked concrete, 3000, fc' = 3,000 psi; h = 18.000 in., Temp. short/long: 32/32 °F Installation: Hammer drilled hole, Installation condition: Dry Reinforcement: tension: not present, shear: not present; no supplemental splitting reinforcement present edge reinforcement: none or < No. 4 bar Seismic loads (cat. C, D, E, or F) Tension load: yes (17.10.5.3 (d)) Shear load: yes (17.10.6.3 (c)) S-36 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 2 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 2 4/15/2025 Geometry [in.] & Loading [lb, in.lb] S-37 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 3 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 3 4/15/2025 1.1 Design results Case Description Forces [lb] / Moments [in.lb]Seismic Max. Util. Anchor [%] 1 Combination 1 N = 1,267; Vx = -885; Vy = 0; Mx = 0; My = 0; Mz = 0; yes 29 2 Load case/Resulting anchor forces Anchor reactions [lb] Tension force: (+Tension, -Compression) Anchor Tension force Shear force Shear force x Shear force y 1 1,267 885 -885 0 3 Tension load Load Nua [lb]Capacity f Nn [lb]Utilization bN = Nua/f Nn Status Steel Strength*1,267 9,832 13 OK Bond Strength**1,267 6,607 20 OK Sustained Tension Load Bond Strength*N/A N/A N/A N/A Concrete Breakout Failure**1,267 5,327 24 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (anchors in tension) S-38 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 4 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 4 4/15/2025 3.1 Steel Strength Nsa = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-3814 f Nsa ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,N [in.2]futa [psi] 0.23 58,000 Calculations Nsa [lb] 13,110 Results Nsa [lb]f steel f Nsa [lb]Nua [lb] 13,110 0.750 9,832 1,267 3.2 Bond Strength Na = (ANa ANa0)y ed,Na y cp,Na Nba ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.1a) f Na ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANa see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.5.1, Fig. R 17.6.5.1(b) ANa0 = (2 cNa)2 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.1.2a) cNa = 10 da √t uncr 1100 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.1.2b) y ed,Na = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min cNa )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.4.1b) y cp,Na = MAX(ca,min cac , cNa cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.5.1b) Nba = l a · t k,c · aN,seis · p · da · hef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.5.2.1) Variables t k,c,uncr [psi]da [in.]hef [in.]ca,min [in.]aoverhead t k,c [psi] 2,313 0.625 9.000 6.000 1.000 1,295 cac [in.]l a aN,seis 19.057 1.000 0.950 Calculations cNa [in.]ANa [in.2]ANa0 [in.2]y ed,Na 9.022 225.67 325.60 0.900 y cp,Na Nba [lb] 1.000 21,739 Results Na [lb]f bond f seismic f nonductile f Na [lb]Nua [lb] 13,553 0.650 0.750 1.000 6,607 1,267 S-39 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 5 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 5 4/15/2025 3.3 Concrete Breakout Failure Ncb = (ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1a) f Ncb ³ Nua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 9.000 6.000 1.000 19.057 17 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 380.25 729.00 0.833 1.000 25,140 Results Ncb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Ncb [lb]Nua [lb] 10,928 0.650 0.750 1.000 5,327 1,267 S-40 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 6 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 6 4/15/2025 4 Shear load Load Vua [lb]Capacity f Vn [lb]Utilization bV = Vua/f Vn Status Steel Strength*885 3,067 29 OK Steel failure (with lever arm)*N/A N/A N/A N/A Pryout Strength (Concrete Breakout Strength controls)** 885 15,299 6 OK Concrete edge failure in direction x-**885 3,545 25 OK * highest loaded anchor **anchor group (relevant anchors) When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 4.1 Steel Strength Vsa,eq = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-3814 f Vsteel ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 Variables Ase,V [in.2]futa [psi]aV,seis 0.23 58,000 0.600 Calculations Vsa,eq [lb] 4,719 Results Vsa,eq [lb]f steel f Vsa,eq [lb]Vua [lb] 4,719 0.650 3,067 885 S-41 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 7 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 7 4/15/2025 4.2 Pryout Strength (Concrete Breakout Strength controls) Vcp = kcp [(ANc ANc0)y ed,N y c,N y cp,N Nb ] ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.3.1a) f Vcp ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 ANc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.6.2.1, Fig. R 17.6.2.1(b) ANc0 = 9 h2 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.1.4) y ed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 (ca,min 1.5hef)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.4.1b) y cp,N = MAX(ca,min cac , 1.5hef cac )£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.6.1b) Nb = kc l a √f' c h1.5 ef ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.6.2.2.1) Variables kcp hef [in.]ca,min [in.]y c,N 2 9.000 6.000 1.000 cac [in.]kc l a f' c [psi] 19.057 17 1.000 3,000 Calculations ANc [in.2]ANc0 [in.2]y ed,N y cp,N Nb [lb] 380.25 729.00 0.833 1.000 25,140 Results Vcp [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcp [lb]Vua [lb] 21,856 0.700 1.000 1.000 15,299 885 S-42 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 8 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 8 4/15/2025 4.3 Concrete edge failure in direction x- Vcb = (AVc AVc0)y ed,V y c,V y h,V y parallel,V Vb ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1a) f Vcb ³ Vua ACI 318-19 Table 17.5.2 AVc see ACI 318-19, Section 17.7.2.1, Fig. R 17.7.2.1(b)* AVc0 = 4.5 c2 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.1.3) y ed,V = 0.7 + 0.3(ca2 1.5ca1)£ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.4.1b) y h,V = √1.5ca1 ha ³ 1.0 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.6.1) Vb = (7 (le da)0.2 √da)l a √f' c c1.5 a1 ACI 318-19 Eq. (17.7.2.2.1a) Variables ca1 [in.]ca2 [in.]y c,V ha [in.]le [in.] 6.000 6.000 1.000 18.000 5.000 l a da [in.]f' c [psi]y parallel,V 1.000 0.625 3,000 1.000 Calculations AVc [in.2]AVc0 [in.2]y ed,V y h,V Vb [lb] 135.00 162.00 0.900 1.000 6,752 Results Vcb [lb]f concrete f seismic f nonductile f Vcb [lb]Vua [lb] 5,064 0.700 1.000 1.000 3,545 885 *Anchor row defined by: Anchor 1; Case 3 controls When the input edge distance is set to "infinity", edge breakout verification is not performed in that direction 5 Combined tension and shear loads, per ACI 318-19 section 17.8 bN bV z Utilization bN,V [%]Status 0.238 0.289 5/3 22 OK bNV = bz N + bz V <= 1 S-43 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 9 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 9 4/15/2025 6 Warnings • The anchor design methods in PROFIS Engineering require rigid anchor plates per current regulations (AS 5216:2021, ETAG 001/Annex C, EOTA TR029 etc.). This means load re-distribution on the anchors due to elastic deformations of the anchor plate are not considered - the anchor plate is assumed to be sufficiently stiff, in order not to be deformed when subjected to the design loading. PROFIS Engineering calculates the minimum required anchor plate thickness with CBFEM to limit the stress of the anchor plate based on the assumptions explained above. The proof if the rigid anchor plate assumption is valid is not carried out by PROFIS Engineering. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility! • The equations presented in this report are based on imperial units. When inputs are displayed in metric units, the user should be aware that the equations remain in their imperial format. • Condition A applies where the potential concrete failure surfaces are crossed by supplementary reinforcement proportioned to tie the potential concrete failure prism into the structural member. Condition B applies where such supplementary reinforcement is not provided, or where pullout or pryout strength governs. • Design Strengths of adhesive anchor systems are influenced by the cleaning method. Refer to the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE given in the Evaluation Service Report for cleaning and installation instructions. • For additional information about ACI 318 strength design provisions, please go to https://viewer.joomag.com/profis-design-guide-us-en-summer-2021/0841849001625154758?short&/ • "An anchor design approach for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F is given in ACI 318-19, Chapter 17, Section 17.10.5.3 (a) that requires the governing design strength of an anchor or group of anchors be limited by ductile steel failure. If this is NOT the case, the connection design (tension) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.5.3 (b), Section 17.10.5.3 (c), or Section 17.10.5.3 (d). The connection design (shear) shall satisfy the provisions of Section 17.10.6.3 (a), Section 17.10.6.3 (b), or Section 17.10.6.3 (c)." • Section 17.10.5.3 (b) / Section 17.10.6.3 (a) require the attachment the anchors are connecting to the structure be designed to undergo ductile yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor forces no greater than the controlling design strength. Section 17.10.5.3 (c) / Section 17.10.6.3 (b) waive the ductility requirements and require the anchors to be designed for the maximum tension / shear that can be transmitted to the anchors by a non-yielding attachment. Section 17.10.5.3 (d) / Section 17.10.6.3 (c) waive the ductility requirements and require the design strength of the anchors to equal or exceed the maximum tension / shear obtained from design load combinations that include E, with E increased by w0. • Installation of Hilti adhesive anchor systems shall be performed by personnel trained to install Hilti adhesive anchors. Reference ACI 318-19, Section 26.7. Fastening meets the design criteria! S-44 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 10 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 10 4/15/2025 7 Installation data Anchor type and diameter: HIT-RE 500 V3 + HAS-V-36 (ASTM F1554 Gr.36) 5/8 Profile: - Item number: 2198026 HAS-V-36 5/8"x10" (element) / 2123401 HIT-RE 500 V3 (adhesive) Hole diameter in the fixture: - Maximum installation torque: 720 in.lb Plate thickness (input): - Hole diameter in the base material: 0.750 in. Hole depth in the base material: 9.000 in. Drilling method: Hammer drilled Minimum thickness of the base material: 10.500 in. Cleaning: Compressed air cleaning of the drilled hole according to instructions for use is required Hilti Æ 5/8 in HIT-RE 500 V3 + HAS-V-36 (ASTM F1554 Gr.36) with 9 in nominal embedment depth per ICC-ES ESR-3814 , Hammer drill bit installation per MPII 7.1 Recommended accessories Drilling Cleaning Setting • Suitable Rotary Hammer • Properly sized drill bit • Compressed air with required accessories to blow from the bottom of the hole • Proper diameter wire brush • Dispenser including cassette and mixer • Torque wrench Coordinates Anchor in. Anchor x y c-x c+x c-y c+y 1 0.000 0.000 6.000 -6.000 - S-45 www.hilti.com Hilti PROFIS Engineering 3.1.14 Input data and results must be checked for conformity with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Engineering ( c ) 2003-2025 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan 11 Company: Address: Phone I Fax: Design: Fastening point: | DLX8 Transformer ANCHORAGE Page: Specifier: E-Mail: Date: 11 4/15/2025 8 Remarks; Your Cooperation Duties • Any and all information and data contained in the Software concern solely the use of Hilti products and are based on the principles, formulas and security regulations in accordance with Hilti's technical directions and operating, mounting and assembly instructions, etc., that must be strictly complied with by the user. All figures contained therein are average figures, and therefore use-specific tests are to be conducted prior to using the relevant Hilti product. The results of the calculations carried out by means of the Software are based essentially on the data you put in. Therefore, you bear the sole responsibility for the absence of errors, the completeness and the relevance of the data to be put in by you. Moreover, you bear sole responsibility for having the results of the calculation checked and cleared by an expert, particularly with regard to compliance with applicable norms and permits, prior to using them for your specific facility. The Software serves only as an aid to interpret norms and permits without any guarantee as to the absence of errors, the correctness and the relevance of the results or suitability for a specific application. • You must take all necessary and reasonable steps to prevent or limit damage caused by the Software. In particular, you must arrange for the regular backup of programs and data and, if applicable, carry out the updates of the Software offered by Hilti on a regular basis. If you do not use the AutoUpdate function of the Software, you must ensure that you are using the current and thus up-to-date version of the Software in each case by carrying out manual updates via the Hilti Website. Hilti will not be liable for consequences, such as the recovery of lost or damaged data or programs, arising from a culpable breach of duty by you. S-46 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Transformer Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Code References Calculations per ACI 318-19, IBC 2021 Load Combinations Used : ASCE 7-22 / IBC 2024 (L<=100psf) General Information Material Properties Soil Design Values 1.50 Analysis Settings 250.0 ksi No ksfAllowable Soil Bearing = = 3.0 60.0 3,122.02 150.0 =0.30Flexure=0.90 Shear = ValuesM 0.00180 Soil Passive Resistance (for Sliding) 1.0 = Increases based on footing plan dimension Add Pedestal Wt for Soil Pressure No: Use Pedestal wt for stability, mom & shear No: Allowable pressure increase per foot of depth =ksfwhen max. length or width is greater than =ft : = Add Ftg Wt for Soil Pressure Yes Yes:Use ftg wt for stability, moments & shears when footing base is below ft pcf Increase Bearing By Footing Weight =pcf Min. Overturning Safety Factor = : 1 Increases based on footing Depth0.750 = Soil/Concrete Friction Coeff. Ec : Concrete Elastic Modulus = =Footing base depth below soil surface ft =Allow press. increase per foot of depth ksf = = Concrete Density = Min Allow % Temp Reinf. ksif'c : Concrete 28 day strength fy : Rebar Yield ksi Min Steel % Bending Reinf. Soil Density =110.0 pcf # Dimensions Width parallel to X-X Axis 8.750 ft Length parallel to Z-Z Axis = 7.50 ft =Pedestal dimensions... px : parallel to X-X Axis in pz : parallel to Z-Z Axis in Height = = in Footing Thickness = 27.0 in= Rebar Centerline to Edge of Concrete... =inat Bottom of footing 3.0 Reinforcing # Bars parallel to X-X Axis Reinforcing Bar Size = 7 Number of Bars = 8 Bars parallel to Z-Z Axis Reinforcing Bar Size =7 Number of Bars =9 Bandwidth Distribution Check (ACI 15.4.4.2) Direction Requiring Closer Separation Bars along Z-Z Axis # Bars required within zone 92.3 % # Bars required on each side of zone 7.7 % Applied Loads 11.575 D Lr ksf L S P : Column Load OB : Overburden = k W E M-zz V-x = =k V-z k M-xx = k-ft= k-ft H = S-47 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Transformer Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Governing Load CombinationMin. Ratio Item Applied Capacity PASS 0.3426 Soil Bearing 0.5139 ksf 1.50 ksf D Only about Z-Z axis PASS n/a Overturning - X-X 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Overturning - Z-Z 0.0 k-ft 0.0 k-ft No Overturning PASS n/a Uplift 0.0 k 0.0 k No Uplift PASS 0.03511 Z Flexure (+X)2.363 k-ft/ft 67.313 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.03511 Z Flexure (-X)2.363 k-ft/ft 67.313 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.02672 X Flexure (+Z)1.736 k-ft/ft 64.971 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.02672 X Flexure (-Z)1.736 k-ft/ft 64.971 k-ft/ft +1.40D PASS 0.04723 1-way Shear (+X)2.026 psi 42.885 psi +1.40D PASS 0.04723 1-way Shear (-X)2.026 psi 42.885 psi +1.40D PASS 0.03491 1-way Shear (+Z)1.479 psi 42.368 psi +1.40D PASS 0.03491 1-way Shear (-Z)1.479 psi 42.368 psi +1.40D PASS 0.04036 2-way Punching 6.631 psi 164.317 psi +1.40D Detailed Results Rotation Axis &ZeccXecc Actual Soil Bearing Stress @ Location Actual / Allow Soil Bearing (in)Gross Allowable Bottom, -Z Top, +Z Left, -X Right, +X RatioLoad Combination... X-X, D Only 1.50 n/a0.5139 0.5139 n/a 0.3430.0n/a X-X, +0.60D 1.50 n/a0.3083 0.3083 n/a 0.2060.0n/a Z-Z, D Only 1.50 0.5139n/a n/a 0.5139 0.343n/a0.0 Z-Z, +0.60D 1.50 0.3083n/a n/a 0.3083 0.206n/a0.0 Rotation Axis & Overturning Stability Load Combination...StatusOverturning Moment Resisting Moment Stability Ratio Footing Has NO Overturning Flexure Axis & Load Combination in^2 in^2 in^2 k-ft As Req'd Footing Flexure Tension k-ft Actual As StatusMuSide Surface Gvrn. As Phi*Mn X-X, +1.40D 1.736 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK X-X, +1.40D 1.736 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK X-X, +1.20D 1.488 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK X-X, +1.20D 1.488 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK X-X, +0.90D 1.116 +Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK X-X, +0.90D 1.116 -Z Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.6171 64.971 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 2.363 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK Z-Z, +1.40D 2.363 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 2.026 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK Z-Z, +1.20D 2.026 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 1.519 -X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK Z-Z, +0.90D 1.519 +X Bottom 0.5832 ACI 7.6.1.1 0.640 67.313 OK One Way Shear X Vu @ +XLoad Combination...Vu @ -X Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 2.03 2.03 2.03 42.89 0.05psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 1.74 1.74 1.74 42.89 0.04psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 1.30 1.30 1.30 42.89 0.03psipsipsipsi OK One Way Shear Z Load Combination...Vu @ -Z Vu @ +Z Vu:Max Vu / Phi*VnPhi Vn Status +1.40D 1.48 1.48 1.48 42.37 0.03psipsipsipsi OK +1.20D 1.27 1.27 1.27 42.37 0.03psipsipsipsi OK +0.90D 0.95 0.95 0.95 42.37 0.02psipsipsipsi OK S-48 General Footing LIC# : KW-06018621, Build:20.24.10.30 KPFF (c) ENERCALC, LLC 1982-2025 DESCRIPTION:Equipment Pad - Transformer Project: Amazon DLX8 Project File: Amazon DLX8.ec6 Vu / Phi*Vn Two-Way "Punching" Shear All units k StatusVuPhi*VnLoad Combination... +1.40D 6.63 164.32 0.04036 OKpsipsi +1.20D 5.68 164.32 0.03459 OKpsipsi +0.90D 4.26 164.32 0.02594 OKpsipsi S-49 YES NO INSTRUCTIONS: ORAN GE COUNTY FI RE AUTHORI TY Plan Submittal Criteria COMMERCIAL projects, MULTIFAMILY RESIDENTIAL projects and RESIDENTIAL TRACT developments · Fill in the project/business address and provide a brief description of the scope of work and type of business operation that will take place. · Answer questions 1 through 10, read and initial items 11 and 12, then complete and sign the certification section. · If you answer: - “YES” to any part of questions 1 through 10, submit the type of plan indicated in italics to OCFA. · In some cases, other plan types not indicated herein may also be necessary depending on specific conditions or operations. · Visit www.ocfa.org for submittal information and locations. If you need assistance in filling out this form or have questions regarding requirements for review, please contact OCFA at 714-573-6108 or visit us at 1 Fire Authority Road, Irvine, CA 92602. Address Suite City Project Scope/Business Description 1. Construction of a new building, a new story, or increase the footprint of an existing building? Changes to roadways, curbs, or drive aisles? Addition, relocation, or modification of fire hydrants or fences/gates? Construction within 300 feet of an active or proposed oil well? Fire Master Plan (PR145) 2. Property is adjacent to a wildland area or non-irrigated native vegetation? Fire Master Plan (PR145); a Fuel Modification Plan may also be required. (PR120, PR124) 3. Located in or < 100’ from a Division of Oil, Gas, and Geothermal Resources (DOGGR) field boundary, < 300’ from an oil/gas seep, or < 1000’ from a landfill? Methane Work Plan. (PR170) 4. Installation/modification/repair of underground piping, backflow preventers, or fire department connections serving private fire hydrant/sprinkler/standpipe systems? Underground Plan. (PR470, PR475) 5. Drinking/dining/recreation/meetings/training/religious functions or other gatherings in a room > 750 sq.ft. (> 1,000 sq.ft. for training/adulteducation) or > 49 people? Healthcare/outpatient services for > 5 people who may be unable to immediately evacuate without assistance? Education for children (academic tutoring for ages 5+ is exempt unless classified as an E occupancy by the Building Official)? Adult/child daycare? 24-hour care/supervision? Incarceration or restraint? Hotel/apartment or residential facility with 3+ units and 3+ stories (3-story townhouses/rowhouses where an independent direct exit to grade is provided for dwelling are exempt)? Congregate housing/dormitories with 17+ people? High-rise structure (55+ feet to highest occupied floor level)? Architectural Plan (PR200-PR285) 6. Installation/modification of locks delaying or preventing occupants from leaving a space or requiring use of a card, button, or similar action to open a door in the direction of exit travel? Architectural, Sprinkler, and/or Alarm Plan depending on the occupancy and type of device installed (PR200-PR280, PR420-PR425, PR500-PR520) 7. Installation/modification/use of spray booths; dust collection; dry cleaning; industrial ovens/drying equipment; industrial/commercial refrigeration systems; compressed gasses; tanks for cryogenic or flammable/combustible liquids; vapor recovery; smoke control; battery back-up/charging systems (> 50 gal. electrolyte, > 1,000 lb. lithium ion); welding/brazing/soldering, open flame torches, cutting/grinding; or other similar operations? Special Equipment Plan (PR315, PR340-PR382) 8. Storage/use/research with flammable/combustible liquids or other chemicals? Motor vehicle/aircraft maintenance/repair? Cabinetry/woodworking/finishing facility? Chem Class & floor plan (full architectural plan if H occupancy); Special Equipment Plans may be necessary. (PR315-PR360, PR232-PR240) 9. Storage or merchandizing areas in excess of 500 sq. ft. where items are located higher than 12’ (6’ for high-hazard commodities, plastic, rubber, foam, etc.)? High-piled Storage Plan (PR330) 10. Cooking under a Type I commercial hood; installation or modification of a fire extinguishing system located in a commercial cooking hood? Hood & Duct Extinguishing System, not just the hood mechanical plan. (PR335) Initial each of the following two items indicating that you have read and understand the statement: 11. *Sprinklers/Alarms: Consult Building/Fire Codes and ordinances to determine sprinkler/alarm requirements; if a system is required, plans shall be submitted for OCFA review. Existing buildings undergoing remodel must be evaluated by a licensed Initials contractor to determine if modification is needed; if so, contractor shall submit plans prior to making modifications. 12. Fire Hazard Severity Zone: Consult maps available at building department or on OCFA website to determine if your site is located in a FHSZ. Buildings in a FHSZ may be subject to special construction requirements detailed in CBC Chapter 7A or CRC R327— Initials the building department will determine specific requirements. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the above is true: Print Name Signature Phone Number ( ) Date / / Building Department: If you have verified that all of the questions have been answered accurately as “NO”, and the project does not otherwise require OCFA review of sprinkler or alarm plans*, then you may accept this signed form as a written release that OCFA review is not required. Should you still require that the applicant have plans approved by OCFA, please initial here or attach an OCFA referral form and have the applicant submit the form along with the appropriate plans and fees for OCFA review. 10-08-14 EE COM O R A N G E C O U N T Y F I R E A U T H O R I T Y Plan Referral Form Required for OCFA to review plans upon the request of the Building Department when the answers on the Plan Submittal Criteria Form (on the reverse) are all “No”. City / County Official Requesting Review: City / County Reference #: Date: __________________________________ City / County: _____________________________________ E-Mail: __________________________________ Contact Name: _____________________________________ Phone #: _________________________________ Title: _____________________________________ ** Have the applicant complete and sign the OCFA Plan Submittal Criteria Form on the reverse of this form. ** Reason(s) for Review: Please describe why OCFA Plan Review is or may be required by the City/County : OCFA COMMENTS:  No further action required on this specific plan type, based on information provided on: ____/______/______.  Project to be taken in for OCFA Review. Other: Name: _________________________________________ Contact #: ______________________________________ Date: _________________________________ OCFA Authorization Updated: 06/02/2020 rs